JP7756411B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a presentation control means for controlling presentations.

For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters the starting slot, a determination is made as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be executed, and after the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating fashion, a symbol indicating the result of this determination is displayed as a static symbol. Then, when the symbol indicating that a special game has been determined to be executed is displayed as a static symbol, a special game in which the player can win gaming media is executed. Some gaming machines of this type execute an effect known as a cut-in, in which a cut-in image is superimposed on the currently displayed effect image in response to the operation of an effect button during a specified valid period (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-80893

However, the effects used in conventional gaming machines are not necessarily sufficiently entertaining, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing entertainment value.

Therefore, the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems comprises:
an input means for allowing input by a player;
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, causing a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol and then statically display a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game will be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
a reservation means capable of reserving the right to make the judgment;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed before the determination is made on the right reserved by the reservation means;
a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
Along with the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to variably display a performance symbol that notifies the result of the judgment,
During a first variable display that displays a variable effect pattern, a first input prompt notification is executed to prompt a player to input to the input means, and a first effect control is executed in response to the input to the input means;
During a second variable display that displays a variable effect pattern after the first variable display, a second input prompt notification is executed to prompt the player to input to the input means, and a second effect control is executed to execute a second input-responsive effect in response to the input to the input means;
a reserve suggestion image is displayed, which suggests that the right to make the judgment is reserved, and a change effect display is executed, which changes the display mode of the reserve suggestion image from a first display mode to a second display mode, which suggests that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first display mode, based on the result of the advance judgment corresponding to the right to make the judgment;
The first input corresponding effect is an effect different from the change effect display, which is executed without using the hold suggestion image,
The first input-responsive effects include a first possibility suggestion effect that displays a first suggestion image that suggests that the possibility of the special game being executed is at a first degree, and a second possibility suggestion effect that displays a second suggestion image that suggests that the possibility is at a second degree higher than the first degree and has display content different from that of the first suggestion image,
The performance control means
When the first possibility suggestion effect is executed, the second input prompt notification is executed with a first probability, whereas when the second possibility suggestion effect is executed, the second input prompt notification is executed with a second probability higher than the first probability, and the second input prompt notification can be executed even when neither the first possibility suggestion effect nor the second possibility suggestion effect is executed .

This invention makes it possible to create highly entertaining performances.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 An enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game in the gaming machine 1. An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as reach effects An explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. Screen diagram showing an example of the effects in normal game mode (part 1) Screen diagram showing an example of the effects in normal game mode (part 2) A screen diagram showing an example of a presentation when a V win is announced during a jackpot game. Screen diagram showing examples of reach establishment promotion effects and reach establishment success effects Screen diagrams illustrating reach success promotion effects and reach success failure effects A time chart illustrating the flow of the performance when the reach establishment promotion performance is executed A screen diagram showing a specific example of an SP reach notice that is performed when a miss notification effect is executed in an SP reach. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first suggestion image displayed during an SP reach; Screen diagram (part 1) showing a specific example of the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice that are made when the SP reach develops into the SPSP reach Screen diagram (part 2) showing a specific example of the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice that are made when the SP reach develops into the SPSP reach A screen diagram illustrating a song selection screen An explanatory diagram for explaining the music selection in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control related to music playback; A screen diagram illustrating an example of a prediction/button effect that is performed before the change starts A screen diagram illustrating an example of a reach-establishment failure effect performed during the relevant change in the pre-reading/relevant button effect. A screen diagram illustrating an example of a reach success effect performed during the relevant change in the pre-reading/relevant button effect. An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of predictive consecutive button presentation FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating storage areas of a main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed on the main control board 80. Detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 28 Detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S211 and S219 of FIG. 29 Detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the big win determination process in step S308 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special drawing stop processing in step S317 of FIG. Detailed flowchart (part 1) of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart (part 2) of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28 Detailed flowchart (part 3) of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed on the sub-control board 90. Detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 38 Detailed flowchart of the pending command receiving process in step S13 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the process of setting the effect pattern of the button in advance in step S138 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pre-read button effect pattern setting process in step S140 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command reception processing in step S16 of FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of the variable performance pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the process of setting a large chance advance notice effect pattern in step S165 of FIG. 45 Detailed flowchart of the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice performance pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100. Detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 48

The following describes a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to one embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, with appropriate reference to the drawings.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Here, Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 2 is a front view of the gaming board 2. As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 mounted within the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main frame for mounting the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged parallel to the gaming board 2 at a predetermined distance, and the glass plate and the gaming board 2 form a gaming area 3 into which gaming balls can flow.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a launch handle 32 for launching game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls to be supplied to the launching device (not shown), and a lower tray 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 33. When a player grips the launch handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the launching device and launched with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32. The launched game ball travels along a rail member 4 located on the left side of the play area 3 and is then guided to an upper position in the play area 3. It flows down the play area 3 along the play board 2, changing its direction of movement as it comes into contact with game nails, windmills, etc. provided in the play area 3.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, which prevents a game ball that has entered the play area 3 from returning to the launching device. A stop button is also provided near the launching handle 32, and by operating this stop button, the player can temporarily stop the launch of game balls without having to return the launching handle 32 to its initial position.

When the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a small angle (a "left hit"), the game ball is launched with a relatively weak launch strength and flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a large angle (a "right hit"), the game ball is launched with a relatively strong launch strength and flows down the right game area 3R after traveling along the rail member 4 located in the upper right corner of the center decorative body 10.

In the left game area 3L, the path through which the game ball passes is provided with devices related to winning and judgment, including a first start opening 21, a second start opening 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning openings 24 (see Figure 2). In addition, in the right game area 3R, the path through which the game ball passes is provided with devices related to winning and judgment, including the second start opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, a gate 25, a first large winning opening 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second large winning opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 (see Figure 2).

As a gaming ball launched from the launching device flows down the gaming area 3 along the gaming board 2, it may enter any of the first starting opening 21, second starting opening 22, general winning opening 24, first large winning opening 26, and second large winning opening 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning position are paid out to the upper tray 33 or lower tray 34. For example, four prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the first starting opening 21, one prize ball is paid out for each gaming ball that enters the second starting opening 22, and five prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the general winning opening 24. Furthermore, ten prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the first large winning opening 26, and ten prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the second large winning opening 28. Any balls that do not win are discharged from the game area 3 through a discharge port formed at the bottom end of the game board 2.

A center decorative body 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the gaming board 2. This center decorative body 10 is composed of a stage section 11 having a gaming ball rolling surface on which gaming balls can roll, and a warp section 12 with a warp entrance and a warp exit at both ends. Gaming balls flowing down the left gaming area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and these gaming balls are discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed in the center of the left and right sides of the stage section 11, allowing gaming balls rolling on the stage section 11 to fall toward the first starting opening 21. For this reason, gaming balls guided to the stage section 11 via the warp section 12 are more likely to enter the first starting opening 21 than gaming balls flowing down the left gaming area 3L without passing through the warp section 12.

The first start opening 21 is a start area that is always open. The second start opening 22 is a start area that is closed when the opening/closing member 23, which is a normal electric device, is not operating and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operating. In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 21 (or the second start opening 22), a determination is made as to whether a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be executed. Then, the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), described below, displays a variable pattern, and a pattern (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) indicating the result of the determination is displayed as a frozen pattern. If a jackpot symbol is displayed as a frozen pattern, a jackpot game is executed, opening the first large prize opening 26 and the second large prize opening 28.

In the following explanation, the judgment made in response to a game ball winning through the first starting hole 21 will be referred to as the "first special pattern judgment," and the judgment made in response to a game ball winning through the second starting hole 22 will be referred to as the "second special pattern judgment," and these will be collectively referred to as the "special pattern judgment."

The first large prize opening 26 is a special prize area that opens depending on the result of the special symbol determination. The opening of this first large prize opening 26 is provided with an opening/closing member 27, which is a plate that opens and closes the first large prize opening 26. The first large prize opening 26 is normally blocked by the opening/closing member 27, which maintains a closed position that forms the same plane as the gaming board 2. In contrast, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is statically displayed as a jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 27 is activated to open the first large prize opening 26, resulting in a jackpot game. During this jackpot game, a long open round game is played in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains the open position (see FIG. 2) that opens the first large prize opening 26, and then returns to the closed position that blocks the first large prize opening 26. The long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is opened continues until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) enter the first large prize opening 26, or until a predetermined time (e.g., 25 seconds) has passed since the first large prize opening 26 was opened (without the predetermined number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 26). In this way, during a jackpot game, a long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is left open for a long time is played. For this reason, by hitting the right side during a long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is left open for a long time, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played.

The second large prize opening 28 is a special prize area that opens depending on the results of the special symbol determination. The opening of this second large prize opening 28 is provided with an opening/closing member 29, which is a blade member that opens and closes the second large prize opening 28. The second large prize opening 28 is normally blocked by this opening/closing member 29 (see FIG. 4(A)). In contrast, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is statically displayed as a jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 29 is activated to open the second large prize opening 28, resulting in a jackpot game. During this jackpot game, a round of play is played in which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position (see FIGS. 2, 4(B), and (C)) that opens the second large prize opening 28, and then returns to the closed position that blocks the second large prize opening 28.

As will be described in more detail later, round games in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed include a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long so that a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) can easily enter the second large prize opening 28, and a short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened short so that it is extremely difficult for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 28. In a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long, 100 prize balls (= 10 balls x 10 counts) are paid out when the player hits the ball to the right. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right during a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed, the operation of the opening/closing members 27 and 29 is controlled to execute a jackpot game in which the player can win gaming balls as gaming media.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, with regard to the short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is briefly opened, the opening time, which is the time during which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position that opens the second large prize opening 28, is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds. For this reason, even if a player hits the ball to the right during the short-open round game of the second large prize opening 28, the game ball will not generally enter the second large prize opening 28, and no prize balls will be paid out.

For ease of explanation, Figure 2 shows the opening/closing members 27, 29 in an open position that opens the large prize openings 26, 28 when the effect symbols are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. However, in reality, the opening/closing members 27, 29 are never in an open position while the effect symbols are displayed in a changing manner. Also, since either the first large prize opening 26 or the second large prize opening 28 is used in each round of play during a jackpot game, in reality, these large prize openings are never open at the same time as shown in Figure 2.

An opening/closing member 23 (see Figure 2) is positioned adjacent to the second starting port 22. This opening/closing member 23 can be changed between a closed position in which the opening/closing member 23 blocks the second starting port 22 and an open position (see Figure 2) in which the opening/closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22.

The second starting opening 22 is normally blocked by the opening/closing member 23. In contrast, when a game ball hit by a player to the right passes through the gate 25, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the second starting opening 22, although no prize balls are paid out. If it is determined that the second starting opening 22 should be opened, the opening/closing member 23 remains in an open position for a predetermined period of time and then returns to a closed position a predetermined number of times. In this way, when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, the second starting opening 22 is in a state where it is difficult for game balls to pass through, but when the opening/closing member 23 is operating, it becomes easier for game balls to pass through.

In the following explanation, the determination that is performed when the gaming ball passes through gate 25 will be referred to as the "normal symbol determination."

The general winning opening 24, like the first starting opening 21, is always open and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) are paid out when a game ball enters the general winning opening 24. However, unlike the first starting opening 21, no judgment is made even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 24.

[Configuration example of main display 40]
Figure 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in Figure 2. As illustrated in Figure 3, the main display 40 is configured to have a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reserve display 44, a second special symbol reserve display 45, a normal symbol reserve display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, a firing direction display 49, etc.

The first special pattern display 41 is composed of eight LEDs designated "i-p," and when a first special pattern determination is made, it notifies the result of the first special pattern determination by displaying a fluctuating pattern followed by a static display of a pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are sequentially lit to display a fluctuating pattern, and the static display of the pattern is achieved by lighting each LED in combination according to the result of the first special pattern determination for a predetermined fixed time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

The second special symbol display 42 is composed of eight LEDs designated "a-h," and when a second special symbol determination is made, it notifies the result of the second special symbol determination by displaying a fluctuating pattern followed by a static display of a pattern indicating the result of the second special symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are sequentially lit to display a fluctuating pattern, and the static display of the pattern is achieved by lighting each LED in a combination according to the result of the second special symbol determination for a predetermined fixed time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42) displays a "jackpot symbol" indicating a jackpot, or a "miss symbol" indicating a miss, as a symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination). The gaming machine 1 provides multiple different jackpot symbols depending on the type of jackpot, and when a jackpot symbol is displayed, a jackpot game is played in which the first large prize opening 26 and the second large prize opening 28 are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol.

The normal symbol display 43 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "s-t." When a normal symbol determination is made, the result of the normal symbol determination is notified by displaying a fluctuating symbol followed by a static symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the fluctuating symbol display is performed by alternately lighting the two LEDs, and the static symbol display is performed by lighting each LED for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the normal symbol determination. Here, when a winning symbol is displayed statically, an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting hole 22 is opened by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state.

In the following explanation, the patterns displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 and the second special pattern display device 42 will be referred to as "special patterns," and the patterns displayed on the normal pattern display device 43 will be referred to as "normal patterns." Furthermore, the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 may be referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern displayed on the second special pattern display device 42 may be referred to as the "second special pattern" to distinguish between the two.

The first special symbol pending indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "u-v," and displays the number of pending first special symbol determinations depending on the lighting status of these LEDs. The second special symbol pending indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "w-x," and displays the number of pending second special symbol determinations depending on the lighting status of these LEDs. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit for these pending numbers is set to "4." The regular symbol pending indicator 46 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "q-r," and displays the number of pending regular symbol determinations depending on the lighting status of these LEDs.

When a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round indicator 47 displays the number of rounds to indicate how many rounds will be played in the jackpot game that is executed in response to the jackpot corresponding to that jackpot symbol. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there are cases where a jackpot game including three rounds is played, and cases where a jackpot game including ten rounds is played. For this reason, in this embodiment, the round indicator 47 is configured with a 3R LED and a 10R LED, and the number of rounds is indicated by lighting up either of these LEDs.

The game status indicator 48 is composed of three LEDs, designated "a1-a3," and indicates the game status of the gaming machine 1 based on the lighting patterns of these LEDs. The launch direction indicator 49 is composed of two LEDs, designated "y-z," and indicates the direction in which the gaming ball will be launched based on the lighting patterns of these LEDs. In other words, it indicates whether the game is in a state where a left-handed shot or a right-handed shot is to be made.

[Configuration example of the effect means provided in the gaming machine 1]
1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 are provided with decorative members 13, movable decorative members 14, frame lamps 37, speakers 38, a performance indicator 125, a first special symbol reserve indicator 126, a second special symbol reserve indicator 127, and the like to perform various performances. In addition, an image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decorative member 13 incorporates a panel lamp 5 (see Figure 5) that is composed of multiple LEDs, and various lighting effects can be created by changing the lighting and flashing patterns of each LED and by changing the color of each LED's light.

The movable decorative member 14 is positioned in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. This movable decorative member 14 incorporates multiple LEDs, and the movable decorative member 14 performs predetermined effects through its own movement and/or light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7, allowing the movable decorative member 14 to move up and down along the display screen 70. The movable decorative member 14 is normally positioned in an initial position (see Figure 2) where most of it is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the bottom end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. In contrast, when a preview effect with a relatively high probability of a jackpot is executed using the image display device 7 and speaker 38, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light pattern and falls to an operating position that covers most of the display screen 70.

The frame lamp 37 is composed of multiple LEDs built into various parts of the front frame 31, and various lighting effects can be created by changing the lighting and flashing patterns of each LED and by changing the color of each LED's light.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays effect images on its display screen 70, and the player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the gaming board 2. This display screen 70 displays effect images including various display objects such as effect images that notify the results of the special pattern determination, characters and items, reserved images (reserved icons) displayed in the same number as the number of reserved first special pattern determinations (or second special pattern determinations), and change suggestion images (icons) that indicate that special pattern changes are being displayed. Note that the image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another image display device such as an EL display device, as long as it is capable of displaying effect images.

The speaker 38 outputs musical pieces, voices, sound effects, and other sound effects either synchronized with or asynchronous to the display effects on the display screen 70, thereby creating an audio effect.

The effect display 125 is composed of two LEDs, and displays changing patterns in accordance with the changing display of special and effect patterns, and displays a static pattern that notifies the result of the special pattern determination in accordance with the static display of special and effect patterns. This effect display 125 notifies the result of the special pattern determination by the combination of the on/off status and lighting colors of each LED.

The first special symbol pending indicator 126 for effect is configured with two LEDs, and by combining the on/off states of each LED, it displays the same number of pending first special symbol determinations as displayed on the first special symbol pending indicator 44. The second special symbol pending indicator 127 for effect is configured with two LEDs, and by combining the on/off states of each LED, it displays the same number of pending second special symbol determinations as displayed on the second special symbol pending indicator 45.

[Configuration example of input means provided in gaming machine 1]
1 , the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means that can be used by the player. The first effect button 35 is a push button that the player presses to input operation information. The second effect button 36 is a push button that the player presses to input operation information by grasping the grip of the second effect button 36 and pressing the second effect button 36. In the gaming machine 1, effects may be generated in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36.

The configuration of the input means is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment, and may be other. That is, for example, in this embodiment, a case is described in which the gaming machine 1 is equipped with two input means, but the input means may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the input means is not limited to push buttons, and may be other input means such as a touch panel that can detect touch operations by the player, an optical sensor that can detect, for example, the player's hand held over the display screen 70, a joystick that can be moved back and forth and left and right to specify position and direction, or an operating means that the player can hold and change its position.

[Example of internal configuration of second large prize slot 28]
4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing control of second large prize opening 28 and V prize opening 287. An opening/closing member 29 that opens and closes second large prize opening 28 is provided at the opening of second large prize opening 28 (see FIGS. 1 and 4A). Also, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C, a second large prize opening sensor 281, a V prize opening sensor 283, an outlet sensor 284, a slide member 285, etc. are provided inside second large prize opening 28.

The second large prize opening sensor 281 detects game balls that enter the second large prize opening 28, and in this embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball passes through the second large prize opening sensor 281. The V prize opening sensor 283 detects the passage of game balls through the V prize opening 287 (an example of a special prize area) defined by the V prize opening sensor 283. The outlet sensor 284 detects the passage of game balls through the outlet defined by the outlet sensor 284. The sliding member 285 guides game balls that have passed through the second large prize opening sensor 281 to the V prize opening 287 or the outlet, and is configured to be slidable left and right in FIG. 4 (the width direction of the gaming machine 1). Figures 4(A) and (B) show an example of a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned in the right position to close the V winning opening 287, and Figures 4(C) and (D) show an example of a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned in the left position to open the V winning opening 287.

When no jackpot game is being played, or during a long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is left open for a long time, the second large prize opening 28 is blocked by the opening/closing member 29, and the V prize opening 287 is blocked by the slide member 285 (see Figure 4 (A)). In contrast, during a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 can be in the following states:

Specifically, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4(A) and (B), the opening/closing member 29 may rotate while the slide member 285 remains in the right position, opening the second large prize opening 28. In this case, even though the second large prize opening 28 is open, the V prize opening 287 is still blocked by the slide member 285. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 28, the game ball will not pass through the V prize opening 287, but will pass through the outlet sensor 284.

Furthermore, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4(B) and (C), the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position while the second large prize opening 28 remains open, opening the V prize opening 287. In this case, since both the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are open, a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 28 will pass through the V prize opening 287 (i.e., be detected by the V prize opening sensor 283).

The V entry port sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability variable switch, and as described above, if a game ball enters the V prize when both the second large prize port 28 and the V entry port 287 are open (the game ball is detected by the V entry port sensor 283), the game will be controlled in the "probability variable game state" described below after the jackpot game in which this V prize occurred ends. On the other hand, if a game ball does not enter the V prize when both the second large prize port 28 and the V entry port 287 are open, the game will be controlled in the "time-limited game state" described below after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. 4(D), the opening/closing member 29 may not be operating, causing the second large prize opening 28 to be closed, and the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, causing the V prize opening 287 to be open. In this case, although the V prize opening 287 is open, the second large prize opening 28 is in an entry-resistant state, so game balls cannot enter the second large prize opening 28.

In addition, the letter "V" is written in a position corresponding to the V prize opening sensor 283 on a transparent member provided in a position corresponding to the area containing the second large prize opening sensor 281, V prize opening sensor 283, outlet sensor 284, slide member 285, etc. (see Figure 2). Therefore, a player can easily identify the position of the V prize opening sensor 283 (the position of the V prize opening 287) by looking at this letter "V."

[Configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1.
A control device that controls the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 5 , the control device of the gaming machine 1 is composed of a main control board 80 that controls the progress of a game using game balls, a sub-control board 90 that comprehensively controls the effects based on information from the main control board 80, an image and sound control board 100 that controls the effects using images and sounds, and a lamp control board 120 that controls the effects using various lamps and movable members. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 90, image and sound control board 100, and lamp control board 120 function as an effect control unit that controls the effects. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, image and sound control board 100, and lamp control board 120 may be configured on a single board.

<Configuration example of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various arithmetic processing related to judgments and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on programs stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the programs, and as a working area for data processing, etc.

Connected to the main control board 80 are the first start opening sensor 211, the second start opening sensor 221, the gate sensor 251, the first large prize opening sensor 261, the second large prize opening sensor 281, the V prize opening sensor 283, the outlet sensor 284, the general prize opening sensor 241, the second start opening solenoid 222, the first large prize opening solenoid 262, the second large prize opening solenoid 282, and the V prize opening solenoid 286. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with four general prize opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general prize openings 24, but for ease of explanation, only one general prize opening sensor 241 is shown in Figure 5.

The first start opening sensor 211 detects that a game ball has entered the first start opening 21 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second start opening sensor 221 detects that a game ball has entered the second start opening 22 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 25 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The first large prize opening sensor 261 detects that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 26 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second large prize opening sensor 281 detects that a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 28 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The V prize opening sensor 283 detects that a game ball has passed through the V prize opening 287 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The outlet sensor 284 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the outlet and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning opening sensor 241 detects that a gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 24 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting opening solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the second starting opening 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the first large winning opening 26. The second large winning opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the second large winning opening 28. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the sliding member 285 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the sliding member 285 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the V winning opening 287.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a payout control board that controls a drive motor that sends out gaming balls from a ball tank located on the back side of the gaming board 2, thereby supplying gaming balls to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34. When a detection signal is input from the first start opening sensor 211, the second start opening sensor 221, the first large prize opening sensor 261, the second large prize opening sensor 281, or the general prize opening sensor 241, the main CPU 81 instructs the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the gaming ball entered, and also manages the number of prize balls to be paid out based on information from the payout control board.

The main CPU 81 also acquires various random numbers as acquired information when a detection signal is input from the first start gate sensor 211, and uses the acquired random numbers to perform a first special symbol determination. The main CPU 81 also acquires various random numbers as acquired information when a detection signal is input from the second start gate sensor 221, and uses the acquired random numbers to perform a second special symbol determination. The various random numbers here specifically refer to jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number used to determine whether a jackpot or a miss is achieved. The pattern random number is a random number used to determine the type of jackpot (such as the number of rounds of jackpot play and the game state after the jackpot play ends) when a jackpot is determined. The reach random number is a random number used to determine whether a reach effect or a no-reach effect is performed when a miss is determined. The variation pattern random number is a random number used to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern when it is displayed in a varying manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), and first determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on whether the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value (winning value) stored in the main ROM 82. If it determines to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number matching the winning value, it determines the type of jackpot based on which of the predetermined random number values (compared to the pattern random number) stored in the main ROM 82 the pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number matches.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game because the acquired jackpot random number does not match the winning value, it determines whether to perform a reach effect or a non-reach effect based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 82 (which is compared with the reach random number). Furthermore, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number, the main CPU 81 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. This determines the variation time of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be played and determines the type of jackpot, it controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 (operation of the opening and closing member 27) via the first large prize opening solenoid 262, the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28 (operation of the opening and closing member 29) via the second large prize opening solenoid 282, and the opening and closing of the V prize opening 287 (operation of the slide member 285) via the V prize opening solenoid 286, thereby playing the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot.

The main CPU 81 also acquires a random number (normal symbol random number) when a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 251, and performs a normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. If it determines that the second start hole 22 should be opened as a result of this normal symbol determination, it executes an auxiliary game to open the second start hole 22 by controlling the opening and closing of the second start hole 22 (the operation of the opening and closing member 23) via the second start hole solenoid 222.

In addition, the main control board 80 is connected to a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reserve display 44, a second special symbol reserve display 45, a normal symbol reserve display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, and a launch direction display 49.

The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41 to 49 that make up the main display 40, and executes the display processing described above based on Figure 3.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub-control board 90 includes a sub-CPU 91, a sub-ROM 92, a sub-RAM 93, and an RTC (real-time clock) 94. The sub-CPU 91 performs calculations to control the effects based on the programs stored in the sub-ROM 92. The sub-RAM 93 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used by the sub-CPU 91 when executing the programs, and as a working area for data processing, etc. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

A first effect button detection sensor 96 and a second effect button detection sensor 97 are connected to the sub-control board 90. When the first effect button 35 (see Figure 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that to the sub-control board 90. When the second effect button 36 (see Figure 1) is operated, the second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that to the sub-control board 90.

The sub-CPU 91 sets the presentation content based on game information regarding special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot play, etc., sent from the main control board 80. In doing so, it may accept input of operation information from the first presentation button 35 or the second presentation button 36 and set the presentation content according to that operation information. The sub-CPU 91 sends commands to the image and sound control board 100 and lamp control board 120 to instruct the execution of the presentation content that has been set.

<Configuration example of image and sound control board 100>
The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of sound effects by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image and sound control board 100 includes an image and sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of mask ROM and stores the control program of the image and sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and various tables such as a display list creation table used in the process of creating the display list. Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) at which the image is to be drawn, the display priority, display magnification, rotation angle, and transparency. The control RAM 103 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used by the image and sound control CPU 101 when executing the control program, and as a working area for data processing, etc.

Based on the above control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, and commands received from the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control CPU 101 instructs the VDP 104 to display image data stored in the CGROM 105 on the image display device 7. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list. The image and sound control CPU 101 also instructs the audio DSP 107 to output audio data stored in the audio ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

CGROM 105 stores the effect data necessary to execute the variable effects associated with the variable display of special symbols and the effects associated with jackpot games. CGROM 105 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed sprite data (a single piece of image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information for a specified range of pixels (e.g., 32 x 32 pixels), movie data consisting of a collection of multiple image data, etc. The pixel information consists of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an alpha value that indicates the transparency of the image. CGROM 105 also stores, without compression, palette data that associates color number information that specifies a color number with display color information for actually displaying the color.

It is also possible to compress only a portion of the image data stored in CGROM 105. Furthermore, various well-known compression methods, such as MPEG4, can be used to compress movie data.

VRAM 106 is composed of SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and although not shown in the figure, it also includes a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, etc.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image and audio control CPU 101. The expansion storage area stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 105 and then expanded. The frame buffer is used for both drawing and displaying image data to be displayed on the display screen 70.

VDP104 decompresses image data stored in compressed form in CGROM105 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded memory area. Furthermore, VDP104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the expanded memory area based on the display list stored in the display list memory area. Furthermore, VDP104 generates RGB signals as video signals indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signals to the image display device 7.

Connected to the audio DSP 107 are an audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110. The audio ROM 108 stores various audio data related to music, voice, sound effects, warning sounds, etc. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 107. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to instructions from the image and audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, performs data processing, and outputs the processed audio data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume in accordance with volume-related instructions received from the image and audio control CPU 101 via the audio DSP 107, and outputs the audio data to the speaker 38.

Note that in this embodiment, we will explain a case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the audio DSP is responsible for sound management, but in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. In this case, there is no need to provide a separate audio DSP.

<Configuration example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, and is connected to the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the effect display 125, the effect first special symbol hold display 126, and the effect second special symbol hold display 127. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, etc. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, etc. The operation pattern data is data indicating the operation patterns of the movable decorative member 14, etc.

The lamp CPU 121 performs calculations based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122 to control the operation of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the effect display 125, the effect first special chart hold display 126, the effect second special chart hold display 127, etc.

The lamp CPU 121 reads out, from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122, light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the light emission of the LEDs built into the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, and movable decorative member 14. The lamp CPU 121 also reads out, from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122, operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the drive of the motor that operates the movable decorative member 14.

In addition, the lamp CPU 121 controls the changing and stopping display of symbols on the effect display 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90. In addition, the lamp CPU 121 controls the display of the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol determination by the effect first special symbol reserve display 126, and the display of the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol determination by the effect second special symbol reserve display 127 based on commands from the sub-control board 90.

[About game status]
Next, we will explain the gaming states of the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states: a "normal gaming state," a "probability variable gaming state," and a "time-saving gaming state."

The "normal game state" is a game state in which a special symbol determination is made in a relatively low probability state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined to occur is low, and a support function (such as a function known as "electric support") that supports the entry of game balls into the second start port 22 is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability that a special symbol determination will determine that a jackpot will occur is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/210) (see Figure 6 (A)). Furthermore, the probability that a normal symbol determination will determine that the second start port 22 will open is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/11), the normal symbol variation time is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 20 seconds), and the opening time of the second start port 22 when it is determined that the second start port 22 will open is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds x 1 time).

The "probable variable game state" is a game state in which a special symbol determination is made in a relatively high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot game being determined to be executed is high, and the support function described above is also provided. In other words, in the probable variable game state, the probability of a special symbol determination determining that a jackpot game will be executed is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 1/60) (see Figure 6 (A)). Furthermore, the probability of a normal symbol determination determining that the second start hole 22 will be opened is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 11/11), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second start hole 22 when it is determined that the second start hole 22 will be opened is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

The "time-saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is made in the low-probability state described above, and the electric chute support function is provided. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the probability that a special symbol determination will determine that a jackpot game will be executed is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/210). Furthermore, the probability that a normal symbol determination will determine that the second start hole 12 will be opened is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 11/11), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second start hole 12 when it is determined that the second start hole 12 will be opened is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

When comparing these game states in terms of the time it takes for the special symbols to change, the time it takes for the special symbols to change in the "probable win game state" or "time-limited game state" is likely to be set to a relatively shorter time than the time it takes for the special symbols to change in the "normal game state." It goes without saying that the probability of a special game being executed (jackpot probability), the probability of a game being determined to open the second start slot 22 (winning probability of the normal symbol determination), the time it takes for the normal symbols to change, and the time it takes for the second start slot 22 to open, shown in the explanation of each game state, are merely examples, and other probabilities and times may also be used.

In the following explanation, the state in which the support function is provided and it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 will be referred to as the "high base state," and the state in which the support function is not provided and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 will be referred to as the "low base state." In this embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "probable game state" and "time-saving game state" correspond to the high base state.

[Game flow]
A game ball hit by a player with the right hand will not enter the first starting hole 21, but may enter the second starting hole 22. However, in a low base state, the second starting hole 22 is difficult to open, and even if it does open, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal game state" in this embodiment), the player will play by hitting with the left hand, aiming at the first starting hole 21.

When a game ball hit from the left side enters the first starting hole 21 during normal game play, a first special symbol determination is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. After that, a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is displayed as a static first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination.

If a losing symbol is displayed, no jackpot game will be played and the game state will not change. On the other hand, if a jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game will be played in which a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot symbol are played, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in a "probable win state" or a "time-saving game state."

In addition, when the game state transitions to a "high-base state" or "high-base state" following the end of a jackpot game, that is, when the game state transitions from a low-base state to a high-base state, the support function described above, which makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22, makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22 than the first starting hole 21. Therefore, when game play is controlled in a high-base state, the player will play by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at the second starting hole 22. Also, when both the right to determine the first special symbol and the right to determine the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when game play is controlled in a high-base state or a high-base state, the second special symbol determination is generally executed.

If a jackpot symbol is displayed as the second special symbol in a probability variable play state or time-limited play state, after the jackpot play ends, the game will generally be controlled in the probability variable play state, but it may also be controlled in the time-limited play state. On the other hand, if a jackpot is not hit in the probability variable play state or time-limited play state, the game state will return from the probability variable play state (or time-limited play state) to the normal play state.

[Regarding special design determination using random numbers]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be explained with reference to Figure 6. Here, Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. In the explanatory diagrams for each random number illustrated in Figure 6 and subsequent figures, the possible range of the random number is set to a smaller range than the actual range in order to facilitate explanation. In the gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball passes through the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22), acquired information such as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number is acquired.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random number illustrated in Figure 6 (A) is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in Figure 31) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, and is set separately for a low probability state in which the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be played is relatively low, and a high probability state in which the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be played is relatively high.

In this embodiment, four winning values for the low probability state are stored in the main ROM 82, and the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the acquired jackpot random number matches one of these four winning values when the game is controlled in the low probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "normal game state" and "time-limited game state"). Also, for the high probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "probable variable game state"), 14 winning values are stored in the main ROM 82, and the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the acquired jackpot random number matches one of these 14 winning values when the game is controlled in the high probability state.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take on 840 values ranging from "0" to "839" in both the low probability state and the high probability state (see Figure 6 (A)). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/210 (= 4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (= 14/840).

<Processing based on random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is to be executed, it determines the type of jackpot based on which random number value, among the random numbers preset for each type of jackpot, the symbol random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the determination matches. In other words, it selects the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) as the jackpot symbol.

(Type of jackpot related to first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in Figure 6 (B), in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are available that can be won in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 21 during normal game play: "3R Special A" and "3R Normal."

Here, "3R Probable Variety A" (see Figure 6(B)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol X1 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, a jackpot game is executed that consists of a total of three long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) in which the second large prize opening 28 is long-open, and two long-open round games (second and third round round games) in which the first large prize opening 26 is long-open.

If this "3R Probability Variety A" is won, both the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 will be fully opened during the first round of play. Therefore, the player can pass the game ball through the V prize slot 287 simply by hitting the ball to the right. If even one game ball is detected by the V prize slot sensor 283 during the first round of play, the game will be controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the jackpot play ends.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game related to "3R Probable Variety A" ends, the number of times (ST count in FIG. 6(B)) the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) and the variable display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) are executed in the "probable variation game state" is set to 100 times, and if no jackpot is determined during that time, the probable variation game state continues until 100 special symbol determinations are executed. If all 100 special symbol determinations are misses, 100 times of time-saving game play are then awarded. Here, "time-saving game play" refers to game play that includes the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) executed in the "time-saving game state" and the variable display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) executed in response to that special symbol determination.

On the other hand, "3R Normal" (see Figure 6(B)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol X2 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, a jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, including one short-open round of play (first round of play) in which the second large prize opening 28 is short-opened, and two long-open round of play (second and third rounds of play) in which the first large prize opening 26 is long-opened. If this "3R Normal" is won, in the first round of play, no prize balls are paid out because no game balls generally enter the second large prize opening 28. Therefore, if "3R Normal" is won, since the number of long-open rounds executed during the jackpot game is two, "3R Normal" can be said to be essentially a two-round jackpot.

If this "3R normal" is won, a short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is briefly opened is executed as the first round of round play. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the V-shaped hole during the jackpot game related to the 3R normal, and after the jackpot game related to the "3R normal" ends, the game is controlled in a "time-saving game state." In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles for the "3R normal" is set to 100, and when a jackpot game is executed in response to the static display of the jackpot symbol X2 on the first special symbol display 41 (which indicates that the "3R normal" has been won), unless a jackpot is determined along the way, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state until 100 second special symbol determinations (or first special symbol determinations) are performed after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, "3R Probable A" is a jackpot with both 100 STs and 100 time-saving cycles (the number of time-saving cycles), while "3R Normal" is a jackpot with 0 STs and 100 time-saving cycles (see Figure 6 (B)).

However, even though winning "3R Probability A" grants the right to have gameplay controlled in the "probability variable game state" after the jackpot game ends, it is conceivable that a situation may arise in which the game ball is not detected by the V entry sensor 283 during the first round of round play due to, for example, a ball jam in the play area 3. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, in order to allow the player to easily aim for a jackpot after the jackpot game ends, if the game ball does not enter the V during the first round of round play related to "3R Probability A," 100 time-saving games are awarded after the jackpot game ends. In other words, the game is controlled in the same way as after the jackpot game related to "3R Normal" ends.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a jackpot, a random number value is stored in the main ROM 82 to determine the type of jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6(B), 50 random number values are stored for "3R Probable A," and 50 random number values are stored for "3R Normal."

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 numbers from "0" to "99." When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 21, "3R Probable A" is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100), and "3R Normal" is also selected at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100) (see Figure 6 (B)).

For this reason, when the result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "3R Probable Variety A" will be displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X2 indicating "3R Normal" will be displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41 are both 50%.

In this way, if the result of the first special symbol determination during normal play is "3R Probable A" or "3R Normal," in either case, the high base state will be reached after the jackpot play ends, and the player will play by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at gate 25 and second starting hole 22.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in Figure 6 (C), there are four types of jackpots related to the second special pattern determination that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22: "10R Probable Change A,""10R Probable Change B,""3R Probable Change B," and "3R Probable Change C."

Here, "10R Probable Variety A" (see Figure 6(C)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol Y1 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a jackpot game is executed that consists of a total of 10 long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) that long-opens the second large prize opening 28 (and V prize opening 287) and nine long-open round games (second to tenth round round games) that long-open the first large prize opening 26.

"10R Probability Change B" (see Figure 6(C)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol Y2 being displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a jackpot consisting of a total of 10 long-open round games is executed, including one long-open round game (first round game) in which the second large prize entry port 28 (and V prize entry port 287) is long-opened, and nine long-open round games (second to tenth round games) in which the first large prize entry port 26 is long-opened, just like when "10R Probability Change A" is won.

On the other hand, if "3R Probability Change B" is won, the second special symbol display 42 will display a stopped jackpot symbol Y3, and if "3R Probability Change C" is won, the second special symbol display 42 will display a stopped jackpot symbol Y4 (see FIG. 6(C)). If "3R Probability Change B" or "3R Probability Change C" is won, a total of three long-open round games will be played, just like when "3R Probability Change A" (see FIG. 6(B)) is won: one long-open round game (first round round game) in which the second large prize entry port 28 (and V prize entry port 287) is long-open, and two long-open round games (second and third round round games) in which the first large prize entry port 26 is long-open.

In this way, if a player wins "10R Probability Change A," "10R Probability Change B," "3R Probability Change B," or "3R Probability Change C," both the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 will be fully opened during the first round of play. Therefore, as long as the player hits the right button during the first round of play related to these jackpots, they can easily obtain the right to play in the "probability change play state" after the jackpot play ends.

For these four types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination, the number of STs and time-saving periods described above are set as follows: For "10R Probable Change A" and "3R Probable Change B," both the number of STs and the number of time-saving periods are set to "100." For "10R Probable Change B" and "3R Probable Change C," the number of STs is set to "100" and the number of time-saving periods is set to "0." Therefore, if you win "10R Probable Change B" or "3R Probable Change C," and all 100 special symbol determinations after the jackpot play ends are misses, the game state will return to the "normal game state." However, if you win "10R Probable Change A" or "3R Probable Change B," and all 100 special symbol determinations after the jackpot play ends are misses, the game state will transition from the "probable change game state" to the "time-saving game state."

For this reason, it can be said that the probability of a player hitting a jackpot in a high base state is higher if they win "10R Probable Change A" or "3R Probable Change B" than if they win "10R Probable Change B" or "3R Probable Change C."

In this embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6(C), 30 random number values are stored for "10R Probability Change A," 45 random number values are stored for "10R Probability Change B," 10 random number values are stored for "3R Probability Change B," and 15 random number values are stored for "3R Probability Change C."

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 numbers from "0" to "99" as described above. When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 21, the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is as follows: "10R Probable Change A" is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100), "10R Probable Change B" is selected at a rate of 45% (= 45/100 x 100), "3R Probable Change B" is selected at a rate of 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and "3R Probable Change C" is selected at a rate of 15% (= 15/100 x 100) (see Figure 6 (C)).

For this reason, when the result of the second special pattern determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y1 indicating "10R Probable Change A" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 30%, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y2 indicating "10R Probable Change B" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 45%, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y3 indicating "3R Probable Change B" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot pattern Y4 indicating "3R Probable Change C" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 15%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game, it determines whether to execute a reach effect or a no-reach effect based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination matches with a random number corresponding to a reach effect or a no-reach effect.

Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random number values for reach effects, and the main CPU 81 determines to perform reach effects when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 10 random number values. Furthermore, 90 random number values are stored for non-reach effects, and the main CPU 81 determines to perform non-reach effects when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 90 random number values. In this embodiment, the possible range of reach random numbers is set to "0" to "99." If it is determined that a jackpot game will not be played, the probability that a reach effect will be performed is 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and the probability that a reach effect will not be performed (the probability that a non-reach effect will be performed) is 90% (= 90/100 x 100).

When the main CPU 81 determines that a reach effect is to be performed, it selects, as the special symbol variation pattern, a variation pattern in which a variation pattern of a performance symbol accompanied by a reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90. Conversely, when it determines that a non-reach effect is to be performed, it selects, as the special symbol variation pattern, a variation pattern in which a variation pattern of a performance symbol not accompanied by a reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90.

[About the game flow]
Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to FIG. 7 . Here, FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board configuration of the gaming board 2, a gaming ball shot into the left gaming area 3L can enter the first starting hole 21, while a gaming ball shot into the right gaming area 3R cannot enter the first starting hole 21. Furthermore, during normal gaming mode, the second starting hole 22 is unlikely to open, and even if it does, the opening time of the second starting hole 22 is extremely short, making it extremely unlikely that a gaming ball will enter the second starting hole 22. Therefore, there is no advantage for a player to hit the ball to the right during normal gaming mode. As is clear from these facts, normal gaming mode is a left-side advantageous state in which shooting a gaming ball into the left gaming area 3L is more likely to result in a jackpot (special symbol determination is more likely to be executed) than shooting a gaming ball into the right gaming area 3R. Therefore, players generally hit the ball to the left during normal gaming mode.

When a game ball hit from the left side enters the first starting hole 21 during normal game mode, a first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed variably on the first special symbol display 41, a first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is displayed as a static first special symbol. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," a missing symbol is displayed as a static first special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see Figure 6 (B)) is displayed as a static jackpot symbol, and a jackpot game corresponding to the static jackpot symbol is executed. These jackpot games are as described above with reference to Figure 6 (B).

When the result of the first special symbol determination in normal game mode is a "jackpot," there are two cases where a jackpot symbol indicating a special jackpot (jackpot symbol X1: see Figure 6(B)) is displayed as a stopped symbol (see Figure 7(A)), and there are also cases where a jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (jackpot symbol X2: see Figure 6(B)) is displayed as a stopped symbol (see Figure 7(D)).

Here, if the jackpot symbol X1, which indicates a probability variable jackpot, is displayed, the jackpot game described above is executed based on Figure 6 (B). When this jackpot game is executed, provided that the game ball enters the V prize during the long-open round game (during the first round of round game) in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are long-open, the game is controlled in the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (B)). As described above, this probability variable game state continues until 100 special symbol determinations (and variable special symbol displays) are made, unless a jackpot is determined during the process. On the other hand, if a jackpot game including the above-mentioned long open round game is played but the game ball does not enter the V due to, for example, a ball jam in the game area 3, after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in a time-saving game state that can continue until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times (see Figure 7 (C)).

Here, in the probability variable game state, the probability of winning the normal symbol determination, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through gate 25, is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment), and the opening time of second starting hole 22 in the event of a winning normal symbol determination is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). For this reason, the probability variable game state is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot (it is easier to execute a special symbol determination) by shooting the game ball into right game area 3R than by shooting it into left game area 3L. For this reason, when gameplay is controlled in the probability variable game state, the player will hit to the right. This is also true when gameplay is controlled in the time-saving game state, which is a high base state like the probability variable game state.

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is controlled in a special probability game state, a second special pattern determination is executed, and after the second special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display 42, a second special pattern indicating the result of the second special pattern determination is displayed as a static second special pattern. Here, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "miss," a missing pattern is displayed as a static second special pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot patterns Y1 to Y4 (see Figure 6 (C)) is displayed as a static jackpot pattern for a special probability jackpot (see Figure 7 (F)), and a jackpot game corresponding to the static jackpot pattern is executed. Here, if the game ball enters the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled again in the variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (B)); if the game ball does not enter the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (C)).

Furthermore, when a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving game mode, a second special pattern determination is executed, and after the second special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display 42, a second special pattern indicating the result of the second special pattern determination is displayed as a static second special pattern. Here, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "miss," a missing pattern is displayed as a static second special pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot patterns Y1 to Y4 (see Figure 6 (C)) is displayed as a static jackpot pattern for a special jackpot (see Figure 7 (I)), and a jackpot game corresponding to the static jackpot pattern is executed. Here, if the game ball enters the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled in a guaranteed variable game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (J)); if the game ball does not enter the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled again in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (K)).

In addition, if no jackpot is determined during the time-saving game state, which continues until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variable displays) have been made, the game state will be returned from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (see Figure 7 (L)).

Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 6(C), the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination include "10R Probability Change A" and "3R Probability Change B," which also award 100 times of time-saving play after 100 times of probability change play, and "10R Probability Change B" and "3R Probability Change C," which do not award time-saving play after 100 times of probability change play. Therefore, if a transition to a probability change play state occurs following the end of a jackpot play related to "10R Probability Change A" or "3R Probability Change B," and a transition to a time-saving play state will continue until 100 times of time-saving play have been played, if no jackpot is determined until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variable display) have been made, the state will transition to a time-saving play state that will continue until 100 times of time-saving play have been played (see Figure 7(H)). On the other hand, if the game transitions to the probability variable game state following the end of a jackpot game involving "10R probability variable B" or "3R probability variable C," the game state will be returned from the probability variable game state to the normal game state if no jackpot is determined until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variable displays) have been made (see Figure 7 (G)).

[About the changing effects]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special pattern (or second special pattern) is displayed in a changing manner and then stopped. Here, we will explain the changing effects that are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special pattern is displayed in a changing manner.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 and a first special pattern determination is executed, the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 41, and then a static display of the first special pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination is displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance pattern display area 73 (see Figure 2) in which a performance pattern announcing the result of the first special pattern determination (or second special pattern determination) is displayed, and in conjunction with the display of the first special pattern, a performance including a display of the performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 2). Then, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a variable time according to the variation pattern selected when the first special pattern determination is executed, as this first special pattern is displayed in a static manner, a performance pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination is displayed in a static manner.

During the display of such changing effect symbols, a so-called reach effect may be performed. Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, three horizontal rows of portions of the effect symbol row, each row consisting of the numbers 1 through 9 written vertically in succession from bottom to top, are displayed. When the display of the first special symbol begins, these symbol rows are displayed in a scrolling fashion from top to bottom (scrolling display). In contrast, when a reach effect is performed, before all effect symbols are displayed in a stopped state, for example, the effect symbols in the left column (left symbol) and the effect symbols in the right column (right symbol) are pseudo-stopped in sequence or simultaneously, without completely stopping. Figure 2 illustrates a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol and three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, while the middle symbol row continues to scroll. Note that a pseudo-stop is an effect in which the effect symbols oscillate in place with almost no movement, and in the following explanation, it may be referred to as a pseudo-stop to distinguish it from a real stop (sometimes simply called a "stop display") in which the effect symbols come to a complete standstill.

When the same effect symbols on the left and right sides pseudo-stop on an active line, a reach is achieved, and a reach effect is performed, inviting the player to hope for three identical effect symbols to line up. This reach effect involves pseudo-stopping the reach symbols (left and right symbols) while slowly scrolling the effect symbols (middle symbols) that make up the middle row of symbols so that the player can identify them, and finally stopping a middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol, or a middle symbol that is different from the reach symbol, on an active line to notify the player of whether they have won or lost.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in addition to the effect symbols, other display objects such as characters and items are used in these reach effects. In the following explanation, in the variable effects in which reach effects are performed, the effects that are performed before the reach is achieved may be referred to as "pre-reach effects."

The types of reach effects will be described in detail later, but if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," three effect symbols indicating a reach miss (for example, "323") will pseudo-stop to notify of a miss, and these three effect symbols will actually stop as the missing symbol is displayed as a stopped first special symbol. On the other hand, if a reach effect is not performed, three effect symbols indicating a scatter symbol (for example, "629") will pseudo-stop to notify of a miss, and these three effect symbols will actually stop as the losing symbol is displayed as a stopped first special symbol. In this way, if it is determined that a jackpot game will not be played, a miss notification effect is executed in which three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped with a reach miss or scatter symbol indicating a miss, and then actually stop to notify of a miss (a jackpot game will not be played).

When this miss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game will not be played, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and effect symbol will be displayed statically for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds), after which the reserved first special symbol determination will be made, and the next variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination will begin.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot," a reach effect is usually executed while the first special symbol is being displayed, and three effect symbols showing a repeating number (for example, "333") are pseudo-stopped to indicate a jackpot, and these three effect symbols then come to a real stop as the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. In this way, when it is determined that a jackpot game will be played, a win notification effect is executed, which pseudo-stops the three effect symbols in a manner indicating a jackpot, and then stops them in a real stop to indicate a jackpot (that a jackpot game will be played). When this win notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is played.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
2 illustrates an example of the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in a normal game state. When a game is controlled in a normal game state, as illustrated in FIG. 2, a reserved icon display area 71, an icon display area 72, and an effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70. As described above, the effect symbol display area 73 is a display area in which the left symbols constituting the left symbol row, the middle symbols constituting the middle symbol row, and the right symbols constituting the right symbol row are displayed.

<Hold icon display area 71>
The reserved icon display area 71 is a display area where a reserved icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is on hold is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, if a gaming ball enters the first start hole 21 in a situation where the special symbol determination and the special symbol variable display cannot be started immediately, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during a jackpot game, the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the reserved icon display area 71 displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved first special symbol determinations indicated by the first special symbol reservation indicator 44. Figure 2 shows an example of a state in which two reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 to indicate that the number of reserved first special symbol determinations is "2."

If a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 when a highly reliable reach effect such as an SPSP reach, which will be described later, is being performed, not only will the display area used for the reach effect be limited, but the display of the hold icon may also reduce the interest of the reach effect. For this reason, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays the display objects (in this embodiment, the hold icon base) and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 during a normal reach or SP reach, but as the reach effect progresses from a normal reach or SP reach to an SPSP reach, the display objects and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 are erased from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach has ended, the display objects and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 are displayed again.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the game ball will not generally enter the second starting hole 22. Therefore, in the normal game state, the right to determine the second special symbol is not generally reserved, and the reserved icon related to the second special symbol determination is not displayed on the display screen 70, nor is a display area for displaying this reserved icon formed.

<Icon Display Area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area that displays the icon as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 as the display of the first special symbol begins to vary, and is erased from the icon display area 72, for example, when the first special symbol is displayed stationary. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased while the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner. For example, the icon may be erased when an SPSP reach, which will be described later, develops or during an SPSP reach.

If a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 when the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed and the right to make a special symbol determination is not reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol begins, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when a reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 and the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 ends, a first special symbol determination is executed for the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (the reserved icon displayed closest to the icon display area 72). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol begins in response to the execution of this first special symbol determination, the earliest reserved icon shifts from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as the new icon. In this way, the reserved icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (see Figure 2). This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71.

In addition, if a hold icon other than the first hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, as the first hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72, the other hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 will shift closer to the icon display area 72. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1, an icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, so in the following explanation, when there is no need to distinguish between the hold icon and the icon, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icons."

(About the icon change effects)
The hold icon is usually displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon). In contrast, an icon change effect may be performed in which the color of a hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes. When this icon change effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon of a color indicating the reliability of a jackpot, such as blue, green, or red. The colors indicating the reliability of a jackpot, as illustrated here, are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of a jackpot. Red is likely to be selected when the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the red hold icon is a "jackpot" or when the result is a "miss" but the special pattern change time is set to a relatively long time. Green is likely to be selected when the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" but the special pattern change time is set to a medium time. Blue is likely to be selected when the result is a "miss" or when the result is a "miss" but the special pattern change time is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of a white reserved icon is set to approximately 1%, the jackpot reliability of a blue reserved icon is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of a green reserved icon is set to approximately 15%, and the jackpot reliability of a red reserved icon is set to approximately 45%.

Note that while the example described here is one in which an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of a reserved icon changes only once when it is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may also perform other icon change effects. That is, for example, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of a single reserved icon changes multiple times, such as when a white reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 and changes to a blue reserved icon and then to a green reserved icon. Also, when a white reserved icon has shifted from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as that icon, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the white reserved icon changes.

In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the hold icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72, such that the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as that icon.In other cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the hold icon is initially displayed in a color other than white (for example, blue), or an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of a hold icon whose initial color is other than white is changed.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays reserved information on the display screen 70 indicating that the right to determine a special symbol is reserved, and is capable of changing the display mode of this reserved information. Note that in the following description, reserved icons and icons with a display color other than white may be referred to as "special icons" to distinguish them from regular reserved icons and icons with a display color of white.

[Modification regarding display control of hold information]
The display control of the pending information is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and may be as follows: That is, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the display colors of the icons (pending icons and the icons) are four colors: white, blue, green, and red, but in other embodiments, other colors may be prepared, such as gold, which indicates an even higher probability of winning than red, or rainbow colors, which are selected only when a "jackpot" occurs.

In addition, this embodiment will be described using an example of an icon change effect that changes the display color of an icon (a pending icon or the icon in question), but the icon change effect is not limited to the effects exemplified in this embodiment as long as it changes the display mode of the icon, and may also be an icon change effect that changes the shape or size of the icon, or an icon change effect that changes the display color in addition to the shape or size of the icon, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the icon change effect for the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71, a case is described in which an icon change effect for the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 can be executed. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which only the former icon change effect can be executed without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon).

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which a hold icon is displayed on the display screen 70 as hold information, and the display color of the hold icon is changed. In contrast to this, in other embodiments, for example, four color LEDs with changeable light colors may be provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of holds for the first special pattern determination may be lit, and the display mode of the hold information may be changed by changing the light color of one of the LEDs.

[Flow of the presentation accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as reach effects. When a first special symbol determination is executed in the normal game state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol is displayed in a static manner in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, as the variable display of the first special symbol begins, a scrolling display of three symbol rows begins in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 8(A)).

Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," for example, different effect symbols may pseudo-stop as the left and right symbols on the active line, and a no-reach effect (see Figure 8(B)) may be performed in which only the middle row of symbols is scrolled in this non-reach mode. When this no-reach effect (a variable effect that does not include a reach effect) is performed, three effect symbols indicating a scatter pattern are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and a miss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, resulting in a miss notification effect (see Figure 8(C)) in which these three effect symbols actually stop.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" or a "miss" but it has been decided that a reach effect (a variable effect including a reach effect) will be performed, a pre-reach effect (see Figure 8 (D)) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, in which, for example, a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line in the effect symbol display area 73, and then a right symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the left symbol, is moved onto the active line. When the same left and right symbols pseudo-stop on the active line, a reach is established (see Figure 8 (E)). When a reach is established in this way, a predetermined reach effect is performed, leading the player to hope that a middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol), will stop on the active line and complete the pattern alignment.

In this embodiment, three types of reach effects are available that can be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol: normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach (see Figure 8).

A normal reach (see Figure 8 (F)) is a reach effect with a relatively low probability of a jackpot (for example, a jackpot probability of approximately 2%). When a reach is achieved, a normal reach is performed first, and during the normal reach, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols, which scrolls rapidly between the two reach symbols (left and right symbols), gradually decreases.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," and for example, variation pattern E (see Figure 9 (B)), which has a variation time of 30 seconds, is selected when the first special symbol variation display begins, a middle symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to display a performance symbol for a reach miss (for example, "434"), and a miss notification performance (see Figure 8 (G)) is performed in which these performance symbols are actually stopped.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and, for example, variation pattern A (see Figure 9 (A)), which has a variation time of 30 seconds, is selected when the first special symbol variation display begins, a center symbol that is the same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to display a repeating number (for example, "444") effect pattern, and a win notification effect (see Figure 8 (G)) is performed in which these effect symbols are actually stopped.

In addition, if a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long is selected, no winning or losing notification effect is displayed in a normal reach, and the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol, passes over the active line, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row increases, developing into an SP reach (see Figure 8 (H)) or an SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (I)).

Although not shown in the figure, when a high-reliability reach effect such as an SP reach or SPSP reach (which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach) develops, the pseudo-stopped left symbol shrinks and moves to the upper left position on the display screen 70, while the pseudo-stopped right symbol shrinks and moves to the upper right position on the display screen 70. These left and right symbols pseudo-stop at their new positions, and the middle symbol row is hidden until the end of the high-reliability reach effect (see, for example, Figures 11(A) to (H)). Furthermore, the display objects and reserved icons that form the reserved icon display area 71 are also hidden (see, for example, Figures 11(C) to (H)). As a result, it becomes possible to perform a high-reliability reach effect in a display area larger than the effect symbol display area 73, thereby increasing the entertainment value of the high-reliability reach effect.

SP Reach and SPSP Reach are configured as battle scenes in which your character fights an enemy character, with SP Reach positioned as the first half of the battle and SPSP Reach positioned as the second half of the battle, and the enemy characters fought in the first and second halves of the battle are the same. In other words, for example, if a battle scene in which you fight enemy character A is played out in an SP Reach in the first half of the battle, and then develops into an SPSP Reach in the second half of the battle, then a battle scene in which you fight enemy character A will also be played in the SPSP Reach.

When comparing these SP reaches with SPSP reaches, the SPSP reach (e.g., jackpot reliability: approximately 35%) has a higher jackpot reliability than the SP reach (e.g., jackpot reliability: approximately 15%), and is characterized by the fact that the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed when the ball progresses to the SPSP reach compared to when the ball only progresses to the SP reach.

In gaming machine 1, a normal reach (see Figure 8 (F)) may progress to an SP reach (see Figure 8 (H)) in the first half of the battle, and the win or loss notification effect of Figure 8 (G) may be displayed during this SP reach. Also, there are cases where a normal reach progresses to an SP SP reach via an SP reach (see Figures 8 (F), (H), and (I)), and cases where a normal reach progresses directly to an SP SP reach without passing through an SP reach (see Figures 8 (F) and (I)). In these cases, a win or loss notification effect is displayed at the end of the SPSP reach (see Figures 8 (I) and (G)).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, at the end of the SP Reach illustrated in FIG. 8(H), a rapid-hit promotion effect (see FIG. 8(N)) may be executed to encourage the player to rapidly press the first effect button 35. When this rapid-hit promotion effect is executed, the result may be that the SP Reach does not progress to an SPSP Reach and a miss notification effect is executed (see FIG. 8(N) and (G)), or that the SP Reach progresses to an SPSP Reach (see FIG. 8(H), (N), and (I)). The series of effects including this rapid-hit promotion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 19.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8(D)), which is performed when a reach has not yet been achieved by the effect symbols, a reach-achievement prompting effect (see FIG. 8(J)) may be executed to make the player hopeful that a reach will be achieved. When this reach-achievement prompting effect is executed, a single press promotion effect (see FIG. 8(K)) is then executed to encourage the player to single press the first effect button 35, and either a reach-achievement success effect (see FIG. 8(M)) or a reach-achievement failure effect (see FIG. 8(L)) is executed depending on the player's operation of the first effect button 35.

Here, if a successful reach-establishment effect is executed, the game will progress directly to an SPSP reach, without passing through a normal reach or SP reach (see Figures 8 (M) and (I)). On the other hand, if a failed reach-establishment effect is executed, the reach will not be established and a miss notification effect will be executed (see Figures 8 (L) and (C)). The series of effects, including these reach-establishment prompting effects and single-press promotion effects, will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 13 to 15.

Note that the types of reach effects and how they develop are merely examples, and other types of reach effects and how they develop may also be used.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal game state]
Next, the process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Here, Fig. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state.

The main ROM 82 stores a jackpot variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9(A)), a reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9(B)), and a no-reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9(C)) as variation pattern selection tables to be referenced when selecting a variation pattern for a special pattern (here, the first special pattern) during normal game play. The jackpot variation pattern selection table is a table referenced to select a variation pattern for the first special pattern when the result of the first special pattern determination during normal game play is a "jackpot." The reach miss variation pattern selection table is a table referenced to select a variation pattern for the first special pattern when the result of the first special pattern determination during normal game play is a "miss" and it is determined (based on the reach random number) that a reach effect will be performed. The no-reach miss variation pattern selection table is a table that is referenced to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol determination in normal game mode is a "miss" and it is determined (based on the reach random number) that a no-reach effect will be performed.

(Jackpot Variation Pattern Selection Table)
In the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9(A)), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with a random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. For ease of explanation, in FIG. 9, in addition to the variation pattern and the number of random number values associated with each variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol, the type of variation presentation pattern selected by the sub-CPU 91 for each variation pattern, the specific presentation content of the variation presentation pattern (and the presentation pattern of some preview presentations), the possible range of the variation pattern random number, and the rate at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 21 during normal game play, it selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading from the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9 (A)) a variation pattern that is associated with the same random number value as the variation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number.

As illustrated in Figures 9(A) and (B), in this embodiment, the possible range of the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set to "0" to "99." In the jackpot variation pattern selection table, as illustrated in Figure 9(A), two random number values are associated with variation pattern A, 15 random number values are associated with variation pattern B, 22 random number values are associated with variation pattern C, 26 random number values are associated with variation pattern D, and 35 random number values are associated with variation pattern E.

For this reason, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot," variation pattern A is selected 2% (= 2/100 x 100), variation pattern B is selected 15% (= 15/100 x 100), variation pattern C is selected 22% (= 22/100 x 100), variation pattern D is selected 26% (= 26/100 x 100), and variation pattern E is selected 35% (= 35/100 x 100). For example, if variation pattern A is selected, variation pattern A is selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a variation effect that displays a win notification effect in a normal reach is performed. For example, if variation pattern C is selected, variation pattern C is selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a reach establishment prompting effect (see FIG. 8(J)) is executed, followed by a reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8(M)), followed by a variation effect that displays a win notification effect in a directly developed SPSP reach. Furthermore, for example, if variation pattern D is selected, variation presentation pattern E is selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a variation presentation is performed in which a win notification presentation is performed at an SPSP reach that has developed from a normal reach via an SP reach.

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for reach misses)
When the main CPU 81 determines in the first special symbol determination that a jackpot game will not be executed, it determines whether or not to perform a reach effect based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, it determines whether to select one of the variation patterns from the variation pattern group in which the reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9(B)), or one of the variation patterns from the variation pattern group in which the reach effect is not performed (a no-reach effect is performed) (see FIG. 9(C)). Here, when it is determined that a reach effect is to be performed, it selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to the reach miss variation pattern selection table.

In the reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9 (B)), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with a random number value that is compared with the variation pattern random number. In normal game mode, when the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and decides to perform a reach effect based on the reach random number obtained together with that jackpot random number, it selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading out from the reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9 (B)) a variation pattern that is associated with the same random number value as the variation pattern random number obtained together with these random numbers.

In the variation pattern selection table for missed reaches, as illustrated in Figure 9 (B), 30 random number values are associated with variation pattern F, 25 random number values are associated with variation pattern G, 20 random number values are associated with variation pattern H, 15 random number values are associated with variation pattern I, and 10 random number values are associated with variation pattern J.

For this reason, if the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and it is determined that a reach effect will be performed, variation pattern F will be selected 30% (= 30/100 x 100), variation pattern G will be selected 25% (= 25/100 x 100), variation pattern H will be selected 20% (= 20/100 x 100), variation pattern I will be selected 15% (= 15/100 x 100), and variation pattern J will be selected 10% (= 10/100 x 100). For example, if variation pattern G is selected, variation effect pattern G will be selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a variation effect will be performed in which a miss notification effect is performed in an SP reach that has developed from a normal reach. Furthermore, for example, if variation pattern H is selected, variation presentation pattern H is selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a reach establishment instigation presentation (see FIG. 8(J)) is followed by a reach establishment success presentation (see FIG. 8(M)), after which a variation presentation is performed in which a miss notification presentation is made in the directly developed SPSP reach. Furthermore, for example, if variation pattern J is selected, variation presentation pattern J is selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a variation presentation is performed in which a miss notification presentation is made in the SPSP reach that has developed from the normal reach via the SP reach.

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for no-reach misses)
The main CPU 81 judges not to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number, and when it decides to perform a no-reach performance based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, selects a variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to a variation pattern selection table for no-reach miss.

The variation pattern selection table for no-reach misses (see Figure 9 (C)) associates the variation pattern of the special symbol with the number of pending first special symbol determinations when the current first special symbol variation display begins.

If the number of pending first special pattern determinations becomes "0" or "1" upon the start of the current first special pattern variable display, the main CPU 81 selects variable pattern K or variable pattern L, in which the first special pattern variable time is 13 seconds. Here, the selection of either variable pattern K or variable pattern L can be determined, for example, by storing random number values associated with each of these variable patterns in the main ROM 82, and determining which variable pattern to select based on which random number value the acquired reach random number matches. Furthermore, if the number of pending first special pattern determinations becomes "2," the main CPU 81 selects variable pattern M, in which the first special pattern variable time is 8 seconds. Furthermore, if the number of pending first special pattern determinations reaches the upper limit of "4" during the first special pattern variable display, and the number of pending first special pattern determinations becomes "3" upon the start of the current first special pattern variable display, the main CPU 81 selects variable pattern N, in which the first special pattern variable time is 4 seconds.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a jackpot game will not be executed and a decision is made to perform a no-reach presentation, if the number of reserved first special symbol determination rights, which is the number of reserved first special symbol determination rights, is relatively large, a first special symbol change pattern with a relatively short change time is selected so that new reserved first special symbol determinations can be accumulated in response to new winning game balls entering the first starting hole 21. On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbol determinations is relatively small, a first special symbol change pattern with a relatively long change time is selected to prevent the first special symbol and presentation symbol from no longer changing and the game from stopping.

For example, if variation pattern L is selected, variation effect pattern L will be selected by the sub-CPU 91, and a reach-achi success inducing effect (see Figure 8 (J)) will be followed by a reach-achi failure effect (see Figure 8 (L)), after which a variation effect will be performed in which a reach is not achieved and a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (C)) will be performed.

From the explanation of the two variation pattern selection tables illustrated in Figures 9 (A) and (B), the following can be said. That is, when the result of the first special pattern determination is a "jackpot," there is a tendency for a variation pattern with a long variation time to be selected, and conversely, a variation pattern with a short variation time to be selected less often (see Figure 9 (A)). Furthermore, when the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and a reach effect is performed, there is a tendency for a variation pattern with a long variation time to be selected less often, and conversely, a variation pattern with a short variation time to be selected more often (see Figure 9 (B)).

From these facts, it can be said that the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the more likely it is that a win notification effect will be executed, and conversely, the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the more likely it is that a loss notification effect will be executed. In other words, when a reach effect takes a relatively long time to be executed, such as when it progresses from a normal reach to an SP reach via an SPSP reach, a win notification effect is more likely to be executed, and when the time required for a reach effect, such as when only a normal reach is executed, is relatively short, a loss notification effect is more likely to be executed. In other words, rather than being notified of a win or loss through a normal reach effect, it can be said that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a normal reach develops into an SP reach or SPSP reach, or when a normal reach develops into an SP reach via an SP reach (or directly without passing through an SP reach).

[Regarding pre-determination processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, a pre-determination process may be performed to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be executed before the first special symbol determination is performed for that right. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, performs a similar jackpot determination process prior to the jackpot determination process (see step S308 in FIG. 31) in the first special symbol determination performed when the variable display of the first special symbol begins, thereby determining in advance whether a "jackpot" will be determined when the first special symbol determination is performed. Furthermore, based on the variable pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, a process similar to the variable pattern selection process (see step S309 in FIG. 31) described above based on FIGS. 9(A) and (B) is performed to determine in advance which variable pattern will be selected when the first special symbol determination is performed.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs a pre-determination process in response to the reservation of the right to determine the first special symbol, it sends a reservation command including pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect described above based on the pre-determination information included in the reservation command. If it decides to execute the icon change effect, it determines the change pattern in which to change the display mode (icon color in this embodiment) of the icon (reserved icon or the icon in question), and causes the image and sound control board 100 to execute the icon change effect based on the result of that decision.

[Specific examples of effects executed in normal gaming mode]
Next, with reference to Figures 10 and 11, a specific example of the effects in the normal game state will be described. Figures 10 and 11 are screen diagrams illustrating the effects in the normal game state, and here, the effects executed when variation pattern D (see Figure 9 (A)) in which a winning notification effect is performed in an SPSP reaching developed from a normal reaching is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal game state will be described. Also, here, during the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, prior to the execution of the winning notification effect (or the losing notification effect), four types of preview effects (first preview, second preview, third preview, and fourth preview) that predict the possibility of a jackpot game being executed (i.e., the possibility of a winning notification effect being executed) will be described as an example.

Figure 10 (A) illustrates an example of a state in which a single reserve icon (e.g., a red reserve icon) is displayed in the reserve icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol to indicate that the result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to that icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is a "miss," accompanied by a frozen display of a performance symbol showing a "526" spread. Thus, when a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the losing symbol was frozen as the first special symbol, a first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest reserve icon (here, the red reserve icon) displayed in the reserve icon display area 71 is executed. If the result of this first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and variation pattern D is selected as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, the following performance is performed.

That is, as the first special pattern determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon is executed and the display of the first special pattern begins to change, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three pattern rows begins (see Figures 10 (A) and (B)). When a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three pattern rows began, the first notice may be executed (see Figure 10 (C)). For example, as the first notice, a step-up notice is executed in which the display mode of the effect image (first notice effect image) related to the step-up notice displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 is gradually changed, and an effect sound related to the step-up notice is output from the speaker 38.

Following the first preview above, a pseudo consecutive effect may be executed (see Figure 10 (D)). Here, a pseudo consecutive effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the effect pattern displayed in the effect pattern display area 73 is displayed multiple times during the display of a single special pattern (here, the first special pattern). For this pseudo consecutive effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scrolling speed of the left-hand symbol row slows down, causing the left symbol (e.g., symbol 6) to pseudo-stop, then the scrolling speed of the right-hand symbol row slows down, causing the right symbol (e.g., symbol 4) (different from the left symbol that pseudo-stopped earlier) to pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle-hand symbol row slows down, causing symbol 7 to pseudo-stop as the middle symbol that indicates the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect (see Figure 10 (D)).

In this way, after different effect symbols have pseudo-stopped as the left and right symbols, when a 7 symbol pseudo-stops in the middle row, the second pseudo variable effect following the first pseudo variable effect begins. Specifically, after the character "x2" indicating the start of the second pseudo variable effect is displayed large in the center area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows resumes in the effect symbol display area 73 (see Figures 10 (D) and (E)).

When this pseudo-second consecutive change effect is being performed, a second preview, for example, a line preview, is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(F), a preview image (second preview preview image) showing a specified character speaking a line is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and a sound effect related to the line preview (for example, the character's voice) is output from the speaker 38.

As described above, when a dialogue preview is executed as the second preview during the pseudo second consecutive change performance, a second pseudo consecutive change performance is executed during the current change display of the first special symbol (see Figure 10 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 10 (G), the scrolling speed of the left-hand symbol row slows down and the left symbol (e.g., symbol 2) pseudo-stops, then the scrolling speed of the right-hand symbol row slows down and the right symbol (e.g., symbol 5) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row slows down and symbol 7 pseudo-stops as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo consecutive effect is executed during the display of this first special symbol variation, the pseudo third consecutive effect will begin, following the pseudo second consecutive effect. Specifically, after the letters "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third consecutive effect are displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the letters "x3" are displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows resumes in the effect symbol display area 73 (see Figures 10 (G) and (H)).

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-third consecutive variable effect began, the scrolling speed of the left-hand symbol row slows down, causing the left symbol (e.g., symbol 3) to pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the right-hand symbol row slows down (same as the left symbol), causing the right symbol (here, symbol 3) to pseudo-stop, resulting in a reach (see Figure 10 (I)).

Note that while the example described here uses a "pre-reach pseudo-consecutive" scenario, which resumes the scrolling display of each symbol row before a reach is achieved, there are also cases where a "post-reach pseudo-consecutive" scenario, which resumes the scrolling display of each symbol row after a reach is achieved, is also implemented.

As described above, when the same effect symbols appear as the left and right symbols to pseudo-stop and a reach is achieved, a normal reach is executed (see Figure 11 (A)). Specifically, after a reach is achieved, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row gradually slows down, and an effect display is displayed showing the middle symbol (here, the middle 3 symbol) that is the same as the reach symbol (here, the left 3 symbol and the right 3 symbol) approaching the pay line defined by the reach symbol.

When a normal reach progresses to an SPSP reach, the following display effect is produced. That is, while the middle row of symbols is being scrolled, a middle symbol (here, a 3 symbol) that is the same as the reach symbol passes over the active line. This causes the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols to increase, making it difficult to distinguish the middle symbol, resulting in a display effect suggesting the progression to an SPSP reach (see FIG. 11(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11(B), the left three symbols shrink as they move toward the upper left area of the display screen 70, rotating clockwise around the scrolling direction as their axis before moving to the upper left area. At the same time, the right three symbols shrink as they move toward the upper right area of the display screen 70, rotating clockwise around the scrolling direction as their axis before moving to the upper right area. After that, until the end of the variable display of this first special symbol, the three symbols on the left will be displayed as pseudo-stops in the upper left area, and the three symbols on the right will be displayed as pseudo-stops in the upper right area (see Figures 11 (C) to (H)).

Next, when a development effect (see Figure 11(B)) suggesting development to an SPSP Reach is performed as described above, a blackout effect is performed (see Figure 11(C)) to make the player anticipate the occurrence of the third notice (see Figure 11(D)) described above. Specifically, for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the development effect is performed, as exemplified in Figure 11(C), a display is displayed in which only the Reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) and the corresponding icon are superimposed against a solid black background image, with other effect images not being displayed.

Following this blackout effect, a third preview, such as a group preview, may be displayed (see Figure 11 (D)). Specifically, as shown in Figure 11 (D), a display is displayed showing a large number of characters moving from right to left across the display screen 70.

However, this third notice will not necessarily be executed when a blackout effect is performed. There are cases where the SPSP reach begins after the third notice is executed following the blackout effect, and cases where the SPSP reach begins without the third notice being executed following the blackout effect. The former case has a higher probability of a jackpot than the latter case.

In this way, when the SPSP Reach begins, an SPSP Reach effect image, which is an effect image related to the SPSP Reach, is displayed on the display screen 70 (see Figure 11 (E)). This results in an effect display that depicts, for example, an attack and defense between the player's character and an enemy character. Then, as the SPSP Reach approaches the end, a first effect button operation promotion effect is displayed that encourages the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see Figure 11 (F)). Specifically, a first effect button image that resembles the first effect button 35 and a valid period gauge that indicates the remaining valid time for which operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed.

In this first button operation prompt effect, when the first button 35 is operated during its valid period, or when the valid period ends without the first button 35 being operated, a cut-in is performed as the fourth notice, for example, by superimposing a specified cut-in image on an effect image (other than a reach pattern) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11 (G)). This cut-in is an effect that indicates the degree of reliability of a jackpot, and may be a green cut-in that superimposes a green cut-in image, a red cut-in that superimposes a red cut-in image, or a gold cut-in that superimposes a gold cut-in image. If these cut-ins are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of a jackpot, the order is green cut-in, red cut-in, gold cut-in.

When a cut-in occurs in this way and the SPSP reach reaches the end, a second button operation prompting effect is displayed to encourage the player to operate the second button 36 (see Figure 11 (H)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 11 (H), during the valid period of the second button operation prompting effect, a second button image modeled after the second button 36, the text "Press!" indicating the operation of the second button 36, and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

If the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period of this second effect button operation promotion effect, an operation-responsive effect corresponding to that operation will be performed, in which three effect symbols indicating a double number are pseudo-stopped and then stopped properly, resulting in a winning notification effect (see Figure 11 (I)).

In this case, because variation pattern D (see Figure 9(A)) was selected when the current first special symbol variation display began, a win notification effect is displayed as an operation-responsive effect. However, if, for example, any of variation patterns H to J shown in Figure 9(B) had been selected as the current first special symbol variation pattern, a loss notification effect is displayed in which the three performance symbols indicating a reach loss are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped as an operation-responsive effect.

[About the effects that occur during jackpot games]
As described above, if the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6B ) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Accordingly, three effect symbols representing a double number, such as "222," are stopped on the display screen 70. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the double numbers "777" and "333" are effect symbols that definitively indicate that the game will be controlled in a probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends. In some cases where 3R probability variable A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (when the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed), one of these double numbers will be stopped on the display screen 70 as the three effect symbols indicating a probability variable jackpot.

In this way, when the three effect symbols representing the double numbers "777" or "333," which definitely indicate a special jackpot, stop as the jackpot symbol X1 is displayed, a jackpot game is executed, including a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are opened for a long time, as described above based on FIG. 6(B). Therefore, during this long-open round game, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 12(B) and (C)) is executed as an in-round effect to encourage the player to launch the game ball aimed at the V prize opening 287. When the game ball passes through the V prize opening 287 during this long-open round game, the launch promotion effect ends, and a V prize notification effect (see FIG. 12(D)) is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V prize.

On the other hand, in some cases where 3R Probability A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and in cases where 3R Normal (see Figure 6(B)) is selected, one of seven types of double numbers (excluding the double numbers "777" and "333"), namely "111," "222," "444," "555," "666," "888," and "999," will stop on the display screen 70. Here, if three display symbols representing the double numbers "777" or "333" stop, a guaranteed jackpot notification effect is displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, definitively announcing that a jackpot has occurred. On the other hand, if three display symbols representing any of the seven types of double numbers stop, an operation prompt effect is displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, prompting the player to operate the first display button 35, for example. Depending on the operation of the first display button 35, a success effect (announcement of a guaranteed jackpot) or a failure effect (announcement of a normal jackpot) is displayed. Specifically, if the type of jackpot is 3R probability A, a success effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35, and if the type of jackpot is 3R normal, a failure effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35.

In this way, if the above-mentioned probability change confirmation notification effect or a success effect (in response to operation of the first effect button 35) is executed during the opening period of a jackpot game (when 3R probability change A is won), three rounds of long-open round games are played, including a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are long-opened. These three rounds of long-open round games are as described above with reference to Figure 6 (B) and other figures. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned failure effect is executed during the opening period of a jackpot game (when 3R normal win is won), as described above with reference to Figure 6 (B), a first round of round games in which the second large prize opening 28 is short-opened and two long-open round games in which the first large prize opening 26 is long-opened are played.

<When a V prize is announced>
12 is a screen diagram showing an example of a presentation when a V prize is announced during a jackpot game. When the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a "jackpot," and the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6B) indicating a 3R probability variable A is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41, three presentation symbols indicating a double number "777," for example, may stop on the display screen 70. In this case, the following presentation is performed during a jackpot game related to the 3R probability variable A.

First, during the opening period of a jackpot game related to 3R Probability Variable A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12(A), the words "RUSH BONUS" indicating the type of jackpot this time are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the words "RIGHT HIT" and a right-pointing arrow encouraging the player to hit right are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. The "RUSH BONUS" words definitively notify the player that the game will be controlled in a probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect displaying the words "RUSH BONUS" functions as the above-mentioned probability variable confirmation notification effect.

Following the opening period of the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation A in which such an opening effect is performed, a predetermined in-round effect is executed in association with the first round of round play, which is a long-open round play in which the second large prize entry port 28 and the V prize entry port 287 are long-opened (see Figures 12(B) and (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figures 12(B) and (C), three arrows (with the words "hit right") pointing to the V prize entry port 287 and large letters saying "Aim for V" are displayed large on the display screen 70, and a shot promotion effect is executed in which the voice "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38. In addition, the three "777" effect symbols that actually stopped before the current jackpot game started are displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

In this way, during the first round of play, in which a launch promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to launch a game ball aimed at the V winning opening 287, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, and 1.5 seconds after the second large winning opening 28 begins to open, the V winning opening 287 begins to be opened for a long time. This long opening of the V winning opening 287 continues until the tenth game ball enters the second large winning opening 28 or the V winning opening 287 has been open for 10 seconds. Therefore, as long as the player hits the ball to the right in accordance with the launch promotion effect, the player can easily have the game ball enter the V winning opening 287. Note that this embodiment describes an example in which the launch promotion effect begins with the start of the first round of play. However, in other embodiments, the launch promotion effect may begin partway through the opening period or at the start of the opening period.

Next, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during the first round of play, a predetermined V winning notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball has won a V prize (see FIG. 12(D)). Specifically, for example, a display effect is displayed showing two characters holding up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" in joy, and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, when the V-winning notification effect is executed to notify players that the game ball has entered the V-winning hole during the first round of play, a predetermined interval period begins, and during the subsequent second round of play (the long-open round play of the first large prize slot 26), the star-shaped emblem is displayed in small letters in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(E)). Although not shown in FIG. 12, the same effect as during the second round of play is displayed during the third round of play. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot play following the third round of play begins, the words "Gekitou RUSH Enter!" are displayed in large letters in the center of the display screen 70, and the sound "Gekitou RUSH Enter!" is output from the speaker 38 to notify players that a mode called "Gekitou RUSH" will begin, which definitely notifies players that they are in a "probable chance game state."

[About the effects after the reach success teasing effect]
Next, the effects after the reach-established prompting effect (an example of a first effect) will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 15. Here, Figure 13 is a screen diagram illustrating the reach-established prompting effect and the reach-established successful effect (an example of a second effect). Figure 14 is a screen diagram illustrating the reach-established prompting effect and the reach-established unsuccessful effect. Figure 15 is a time chart illustrating the flow of the effects when the reach-established prompting effect is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 8, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner during normal gameplay and a pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8(D)) is being performed, a reach-achievement prompting effect (see FIG. 8(J)) that encourages the player to expect a reach to be achieved may be executed. When this reach-achievement prompting effect is executed, a single press promotion effect (see FIG. 8(K)) (prompting the player to single press the first effect button 35) is executed following the reach-achievement prompting effect, and a reach-achievement success effect (see FIG. 8(M)) or a reach-achievement failure effect (see FIG. 8(L)) is executed as an effect corresponding to the operation performed in response to the single press of the first effect button 35 in response to this single press promotion effect. In other words, depending on the operation (single press) of the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the single press promotion effect, there are cases where a reach-achievement success effect is executed without a reach-achievement failure effect being executed, and cases where a reach-achievement failure effect is executed without a reach-achievement success effect being executed.

<Examples of reach success promotion and reach success promotion>
Here, first, with reference to Figure 13, we will explain a specific example of a series of effects when the effects progress in the order of a reach-establishment prompting effect, a single-push promotion effect, and a reach-establishment success effect. Figure 13 (A) illustrates a state in which two reserve icons (e.g., a red reserve icon and a white reserve icon) are displayed in the reserve icon display area 71, and a loss symbol is displayed as the first special symbol to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is a "miss," and an effect symbol showing a "157" scatter symbol is displayed. In this way, when a predetermined determination time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the loss symbol was displayed as the first special symbol, a first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest reserve icon displayed in the reserve icon display area 71 (here, the red reserve icon) is executed. If the result of the first special pattern determination is a "jackpot" and variation pattern C (see Figure 9(A)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special pattern, or if the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and variation pattern H (see Figure 9(B)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special pattern, the following presentation may be performed.

In other words, when the first special pattern determination corresponding to the first hold icon (here, the red hold icon) is executed and variation pattern C (or variation pattern H) is selected, the display of the first special pattern variation begins in response to the execution of this first special pattern determination, and the red hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three pattern rows begins (see Figures 13 (A) and (B)). Note that Figure 13 (B) illustrates the state immediately after the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 change from two to one as the pattern variation corresponding to the red hold icon begins.

In this way, once a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change corresponding to the red pending icon began, the reach completion prompting effect (see FIG. 8(J)) will begin (see FIG. 13(C)). In this embodiment, this reach completion prompting effect is composed of a character dialogue effect (see FIG. 13(C)) and a reach symbol appearance effect (see FIG. 13(D)) following the character dialogue effect.

In the character dialogue effect, as shown in Figure 13 (C), a specific character appears on the display screen 70, and an effect image is displayed on the display screen 70 depicting the character uttering the line, "A big chance with a reach!?" Along with this, audio with the same content as the above line is output from the speaker 35. Note that this character dialogue effect is performed before the effect symbols that have the potential to become reach symbols are visibly displayed, and in this embodiment, it is performed while the scrolling display of the three symbol rows continues (see Figure 13 (C)).

In the reach symbol appearance effect, as illustrated in Figure 13 (D), an effect display is displayed showing one effect symbol that makes up the left column of symbols (here, the left 3 symbols) and one effect symbol that makes up the right column of symbols (here, the right 3 symbols) slowly descending simultaneously. In this way, when the two common effect symbols descend to a predetermined position in the reach symbol appearance effect, a single press promotion effect begins (see Figure 13 (E)). This single press promotion effect is executed during the valid period in which operation of the first effect button 35 is valid, and in this single press promotion effect, a first effect button image that resembles the first effect button 35, the word "PRESS!" indicating the operation that should be performed on the first effect button 35, and a valid period gauge that indicates the remaining valid period in which operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed.

When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period of such a single-press promotion effect, the valid period ends and a reach-achi success effect (see FIG. 8(M)) is executed (see FIG. 13(F)). This reach-achi success effect is an effect that notifies the player that a reach has been successfully achieved, and in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 13(F), two effect symbols (here, three symbols on the left and three symbols on the right) that had descended to a predetermined position are further descended to the active line and pseudo-stopped on the active line, and a linear image extending across these effect symbols is displayed, and an effect image is also displayed showing a character appearing in a character line effect saying the line, "Good job!!"

This reach-establishment success effect is executed when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for the single-press promotion effect, or when the valid period for the single-press promotion effect ends without the first effect button 35 being operated.

When a successful reach is achieved in this way, a development effect and a blackout effect are executed in the same manner as described above based on Figures 11(B) and (C) (see Figures 13(G) and (H)), and the game progresses directly to an SPSP reach without passing through a normal reach or SP reach (see Figure 13(I)). Figures 13(G) to (I) show examples of direct development from a development effect via a blackout effect to an SPSP reach, but as exemplified in Figures 11(B) to (E), there are also presentation patterns in which a development effect progresses directly to an SPSP reach via a blackout effect and a group preview, as exemplified in Figures 11(B) to (E).

The effects that occur after the development of an SPSP reach have been described above based on Figures 11 (E) to (I), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Here, with reference to Figure 13, we have explained an example in which a series of effects progresses in the order of a reach success prompt effect, a single press promotion effect, a reach success effect, and an SPSP reach while the first special symbol corresponding to a red hold icon is displayed in a changing state. However, this series of effects may also progress while the first special symbol corresponding to a white hold icon, which is the default hold icon, is displayed in a changing state, or while the first special symbol corresponding to a special icon other than red is displayed in a changing state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach-achi achievement prompting effect is described as being composed of a character dialogue effect and a reach symbol appearance effect as exemplified in Figures 13 (C) and (D), but the reach-achi achievement prompting effect may be another effect as long as it can make the player excited about the achievement of a reach. For example, it may be possible to execute a reach symbol appearance effect as the reach-achi achievement prompting effect without executing a character dialogue effect.

<Examples of reach success and reach failure>
Next, a specific example of a series of effects when the effects progress in the order of a reach establishment encouraging effect, a single push encouraging effect, and a reach establishment failure effect will be described with reference to Figure 14. If the result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state is "miss" and variation pattern L (see Figure 9 (C)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, when the first special symbol is displayed in variation pattern L, the following effects are performed.

When the first special symbol is displayed in variable pattern L, a reach completion promotion effect consisting of a character dialogue effect and a reach symbol appearance effect is executed, similar to what was described above based on Figures 13(C) and (D) (see Figures 14(A) and (B)). Figure 14(A) illustrates an example in which a single reserved icon is displayed in reserved icon display area 71, and three symbol rows corresponding to that icon (here, the white icon) displayed in icon display area 72 are scrolled, with a character dialogue effect similar to that of Figure 13(C). Figure 14(B) also illustrates an example in which a reach symbol appearance effect similar to that described above based on Figure 13(D) is executed, showing one symbol (here, the left four symbols) constituting the left symbol row and one symbol (here, the right four symbols) constituting the right symbol row slowly descending simultaneously.

When the two common symbols descend to a predetermined position due to this reach symbol appearance effect, a single-press promotion effect similar to the single-press promotion effect exemplified in FIG. 13(E) is initiated (see FIG. 14(C)). If the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period of this single-press promotion effect, a reach-failure effect (see FIG. 8(L)) is executed (see FIGS. 14(D)-(G)). This reach-failure effect notifies the player that a reach has failed to be achieved. In this embodiment, the reach-failure effect begins by first introducing two symbols (here, the left four symbols and the right four symbols) that have descended to a predetermined position, and the left symbol (here, the left four symbols) descends further to the pay line and comes to a virtual stop on the pay line, but then the right symbol (here, the right four symbols) slides past the pay line, causing the scrolling display of the right column of symbols to resume (see FIG. 14(D)). Then, a right symbol (here, the right 5 symbol) representing a number one greater than the left symbol that has stopped pseudo-on the active line descends, and an effect is displayed showing the right symbol stopping pseudo-on the active line (see Figures 14(E) and (F)). At this time, an effect is also displayed showing a character appearing in the character dialogue effect (see Figure 14(A)) saying something like "Sorry..."

In this way, when the left symbol and the right symbol, which represents a number one larger than the left symbol, pseudo-stop on the active line, a display will be displayed showing the middle symbol, which represents the same number as the right symbol, descending (see Figure 14 (G)). Then, at the end of this first special symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, which represents a number one larger than the left symbol, and the right symbol, which also represents a number one larger than the left symbol, pseudo-stop, and as the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification display will be executed in which these three symbols actually stop (see Figure 8 (C) and Figures 14 (H)-(I)).

The above-mentioned reach-failure effect is executed when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for the single-press promotion effect, or when the valid period for the single-press promotion effect ends without the first effect button 35 being operated.

So far, with reference to Figures 13 and 14, we have explained specific examples of a series of effects when a reach-achievement prompting effect (and a single-press promotion effect) is followed by a reach-achievement success effect (or a reach-achievement failure effect). However, a reach-achievement prompting effect is an effect that can trigger the execution of an SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect. For this reason, by executing a reach-achievement prompting effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment employs the following configuration in relation to the display of icons (reserved icons and the icon in question). That is, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, while the first special symbol corresponding to a white or blue icon is being displayed in a variable manner, a reach effect may or may not be executed. On the other hand, while the first special symbol corresponding to a green or red icon, which has a higher reliability of a jackpot, is being displayed in a variable manner, a reach effect is always executed. And, as described above, if a reach successful execution effect is executed after a reach successful execution effect, the game will progress directly to an SPSP reach without passing through a normal reach or SP reach.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment employs such a configuration, so that, for example, by executing a reach-achievement prompting effect while a green icon (or a red icon) is displayed, the player can be made aware that the situation will progress to an SPSP reach at that point, effectively increasing the player's anticipation for a jackpot even earlier than when a reach-achievement success effect is executed. Furthermore, even when a reach-achievement prompting effect is executed while a white icon (or a blue icon) is displayed, there is a possibility that the situation will progress directly to an SPSP reach afterwards, which can surprise players who were not expecting a jackpot based on the color of the icon, resulting in a highly effective presentation.

<Playback control of effect sound when reach establishment promotion effect is executed>
Next, the playback control of the effect sound when a reach-establishment prompting effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Here, Fig. 15 is a time chart illustrating the flow of the effect when a reach-establishment prompting effect is executed, Fig. 15(A) illustrates the flow of the effect when a reach-establishment failure effect is executed after a reach-establishment prompting effect, and Fig. 15(B) illustrates the flow of the effect when a reach-establishment success effect is executed after a reach-establishment prompting effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the normal game mode, the sub-CPU 91 transmits a variable display start command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to instruct the image and sound control board 100 to start the variable display using the variable display pattern set in step S163 (see FIG. 43) and to execute a preview display using the preview display pattern set in step S164 (see FIG. 43). In response to this, based on the received variable display start command, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 instructs the VDP 104 to execute processing to display image data stored in the CGROM 105 on the image display device 7, and instructs the sound DSP 107 to execute processing to output sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38. As a result, the variable display (and preview display) using the display pattern set by the sub-CPU 91 is realized using the image display device 7, speaker 38, etc.

(When a reach failure effect is executed)
As described above, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable pattern L (see FIG. 9(C)) in the normal game mode, the effects may progress in the order of a reach-achi achievement encouraging effect (see FIG. 8(J)), a single press promotion effect (see FIG. 8(K)), a reach-achi failure effect (see FIG. 8(L)), and a miss notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)). Specific examples of this series of effects are as described above with reference to FIG. 14. During the variable display of the first special symbol in which this series of effects is performed, the following sound effects are reproduced using the speaker 38.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 15(A), a predetermined sound effect is played from the time the display of the first special symbol in the variation pattern L begins until the character dialogue effect (see FIG. 14(A)), which constitutes the reach-achi teasing effect, begins. Then, during the execution period of the character dialogue effect and the reach symbol appearance effect (see FIG. 14(B)) as the reach-achi teasing effect on the display screen 70, a predetermined teasing effect-specific music is played to heighten the player's anticipation for the reach-achi achievement (see FIG. 15(A)). This teasing effect-specific music is a music exclusive to the reach-achi teasing effect that is only played during the execution period of the reach-achi teasing effect, and the playback of the teasing effect-specific music ends with the start of the valid period for the single-press promotion effect (see FIG. 14(C)), and during this valid period, a silent period occurs in which no sound effect is played.

In this way, the character dialogue effect, the reach symbol appearance effect, and the playback of music specifically for the promotional effect heighten the player's anticipation of a reach being achieved, before transitioning to the silent period described above. This allows the player to concentrate on operating the first effect button 35 while hoping for a reach to be achieved.

The valid period (and silent period) for the single press promotion effect ends when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period, or when the preset time from the start to the end of the valid period has elapsed without the first effect button 35 being operated during the valid period. As the valid period for the single press promotion effect ends, a reach-failure effect (see Figures 14 (D) to (G)) is displayed on the display screen 70. During the execution of this reach-failure effect, a predetermined music dedicated to the failure effect is played to effectively notify players that the reach has failed to be achieved (see Figure 15 (A)). Then, as the miss notification effect following the reach-failure effect begins, the playback of the failure effect music ends and the playback of a predetermined variable effect sound begins.

Here, the music dedicated to the failure effect is a music dedicated to the failure to reach effect that is only played during the execution period of the failure to reach effect, and playback of the music dedicated to the failure effect begins with the end of the valid period for the single press promotion effect (see Figure 14 (C)), and ends with the start of the miss notification effect.

(When a successful reach is achieved)
As described above, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable pattern C (see FIG. 9(A)) or a variable pattern H (see FIG. 9(B)) in the normal game mode, the effects may progress in the order of a reach establishment encouraging effect (see FIG. 8(J)), a single press promotion effect (see FIG. 8(K)), a reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8(M)), and an SPSP reach (see FIG. 8(I)). Specific examples of this series of effects are as described above with reference to FIG. 13. During the variable display of the first special symbol in which this series of effects is performed, the following sound effects are reproduced using the speaker 38.

In other words, as illustrated in FIG. 15(B), a predetermined sound effect is played from the time the display of the first special symbol in variation pattern C (or variation pattern H) begins until the character dialogue effect (see FIG. 13(C)), which constitutes the reach-achi promotion effect, begins. Then, during the execution period of the character dialogue effect and the reach symbol appearance effect (see FIG. 13(D)) as the reach-achi promotion effect on the display screen 70, a predetermined music exclusive to the promotion effect is played (see FIG. 15(B)), in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 15(A). Playback of this music exclusive to the promotion effect ends with the start of the valid period for the single-press promotion effect (see FIG. 13(E)), and during this valid period, a silent period occurs in which no sound effect is played.

The flow of effects and the playback control of effect sounds until the valid period for this single press promotion effect ends are the same as those described above with reference to Figure 15 (A). However, if variation pattern C (or variation pattern H) is selected, a reach-achi success effect (see Figure 13 (F)) is performed on the display screen 70 as the valid period for the single press promotion effect ends. During the execution period of this reach-achi success effect, a predetermined success effect-specific music is played to effectively notify the user that a reach has been successfully achieved (see Figure 15 (B)). Then, during the period during which the development effect (and blackout effect) is executed following the reach-achi success effect, there is a silent period, just like during the valid period of the single press promotion effect. After that, when the effect develops into an SPSP reach, playback of the SPSP-specific music begins (see Figure 15 (B)).

Here, the music dedicated to the success effect is a music dedicated to the success effect of a reach that is only played during the execution period of the success effect of a reach that is achieved. Playback of the music dedicated to the success effect begins with the end of the valid period for the single press promotion effect (see Figure 13 (E)) and ends with the start of the development effect (see Figure 15 (B)).

(About the acoustic data)
The sound ROM 108 (see FIG. 5) stores SPSP direct development sound data and failure sound data as sound data for playing dedicated music corresponding to the reach-established hype effect, reach-established success effect, and reach-established failure effect, respectively. Here, the SPSP direct development sound data is sound data for playing music dedicated to the hype effect and the success effect, and in this embodiment, it is configured to have a hype part and a success part (see FIGS. 15(A) and (B)). On the other hand, the failure sound data is sound data for playing music dedicated to the failure effect, and in this embodiment, it is configured to have a failure part (see FIG. 15(A)).

As illustrated in FIG. 15(B), when a reach-established successful performance is executed after a reach-established teasing performance, the audio DSP 107 reads SPSP direct development audio data from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109 and executes data processing based on instructions from the image and audio control CPU 101. Then, during the execution of the reach-established teasing performance, the teasing part of the data-processed SPSP direct development audio data is output to the speaker 38 via the amplifier 110. Then, during the execution of the single-press promotion performance, the output of the data-processed SPSP direct development audio data is suspended, and with the start of the reach-established successful performance, the output of the SPSP direct development audio data is resumed from the success part of the data-processed SPSP direct development audio data. As a result, during the execution of the reach-established teasing performance, the teasing part is output, causing a music dedicated to the teasing performance to be played, and during the execution of the reach-established successful performance, the success part is output, causing a music dedicated to the success performance to be played (see FIG. 15(B)).

On the other hand, as illustrated in Figure 15(A), when a reach-established failure effect is executed after a reach-established prompting effect, the audio DSP 107 reads the SPSP direct development audio data and failure audio data from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109 and executes data processing based on instructions from the image and audio control CPU 101. Then, during the execution of the reach-established prompting effect, the prompting part of the processed SPSP direct development audio data is output to the speaker 38 via the amplifier 110, and with the start of the single-press prompting effect, the output of the SPSP direct development audio data is terminated. Thereafter, with the start of the reach-established failure effect, the output of the processed failure audio data is initiated. As a result, during the execution of the reach-established prompting effect, the prompting part of the SPSP direct development audio data is output, thereby playing music dedicated to the prompting effect, and during the execution of the reach-established failure effect, the failure audio data is output, thereby playing music dedicated to the failure effect (see Figure 15(A)).

(About the melody)
The music dedicated to the hype effect played during the execution of the reach-achi achievement prompting effect is configured as a first musical style that heightens the player's expectations for the reach achievement (see FIGS. 15A and 15B). In contrast, the music dedicated to the success effect played during the execution of the reach-achi achievement success effect that may be performed after the reach-achi achievement prompting effect is configured as a second musical style that is different from the first musical style and effectively notifies the player of the reach achievement (see FIG. 15B).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the playback of the music dedicated to the hype effect and the music dedicated to the success effect are realized by a single piece of audio data called SPSP direct development audio data (see Figure 15 (B)). For this reason, the SPSP direct development audio data is configured as audio data for playing a music performance with a first melody for the hype part, and audio data for playing a music performance with a second melody for the success part. In other words, when the hype part and the success part are output consecutively, the SPSP direct development audio data is configured so that the melody of the performance music being played changes midway when the output of the success part starts.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the playback of the music dedicated to the failure effect is achieved by failure sound data (see Figure 15 (A)), and this failure sound data is configured as sound data for playing a music effect of a third music style that is different from both the first music style and the second music style.

In this way, in this embodiment, the melody of the music dedicated to the hype effect, the melody of the music dedicated to the success effect, and the melody of the music dedicated to the failure effect are all different. Therefore, when a reach success effect (or reach failure effect) is executed after a reach effect hype effect, it is easy to determine whether a reach success effect or a reach failure effect is being executed based on the melody of the effect music output from speaker 38. A high effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the reach success effect (or reach failure effect) being executed on display screen 70 and the effect music output from speaker 38.

(Gaming machine 1 capable of executing reach-achievement inciting effects and reach-achievement success effects)
So far, we have explained the effects such as the reach-establishment prompting effect, reach-establishment success effect, and reach-establishment failure effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, but such a gaming machine 1 can be considered as a gaming machine as follows.

A determination means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31, which will be described later: see FIG. 5) that determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player;
a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the special game opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28) that executes the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
Based on the result of the determination (for example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state), a first effect (for example, a reach establishment inciting effect: see FIGS. 13(C)-(D), 14(A)-(B), and 15) and a second effect that may be performed after the first effect (for example, a reach establishment success effect: see FIGS. 13(F) and 15) can be executed.
During the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect, a predetermined effect music (for example, a music exclusively for the promotion effect and a music exclusively for the success effect exemplified in FIG. 15(B)) that is not output when these effects are not being executed is played,
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized by controlling the playback of performance music so that a performance music of a first melody is played during execution of the first performance, and a performance music of a second melody different from the first melody is played during execution of the second performance (see Figure 15 (B)).

With this gaming machine, a predetermined musical effect is played during the execution of the first and second effects, and is not output when these effects are not being executed. Different musical effects (e.g., a dedicated music piece for the promotional effect and a dedicated music piece for the success effect) are played during the execution of the first and second effects (see, for example, Figure 15(B)). Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the first or second effect is being executed based on the musical effect being played, and can easily determine whether the first or second effect is being executed based on the musical effect of the musical effect being played. This easily prevents the player from noticing the transition from the first effect to the second effect, and the synergistic effect of the execution of the first and second effects and the playback of the musical effect can achieve a high performance effect.

(Other configurations related to reach establishment promotion effects, reach establishment success effects, and reach establishment failure effects)
The following configurations may be adopted for the reach success prompting effect, reach success effect, and reach failure effect.

In other words, in this embodiment, during the period from the end of the reach-establishment prompting effect to the start of the reach-establishment success effect (or reach-establishment failure effect), a single press promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to press the first effect button 35 once, and the reach-establishment success effect (or reach-establishment failure effect) is executed in response to a single press of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of this single press promotion effect. In contrast, in other embodiments, instead of a single press promotion effect that encourages the player to press the first effect button 35 once, for example, a rapid press promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to press the first effect button 35 repeatedly, and the reach-establishment success effect (or reach-establishment failure effect) is executed on the condition that the first effect button 35 is operated a predetermined number of times during the valid period of this rapid press promotion effect. Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a long press promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to press and hold the first effect button 35, and a reach success effect (or reach failure effect) is executed on the condition that the operation time of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of this long press promotion effect reaches a predetermined time.

Furthermore, the operating means operated by the player in response to the single press promotion effect in this embodiment (see FIG. 15) or the rapid press promotion effect in the other embodiments described above is not limited to the first effect button 35, but may also be the second effect button 36. In other words, following the reach establishment encouragement effect, a single press promotion effect (or rapid press promotion effect) may be executed to encourage the player to single press (or rapid press) the second effect button 36, and a reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect) may be executed in response to a single press (or a predetermined number of intermittent operations: rapid presses) of the second effect button 36 during the valid period of the single press promotion effect (or rapid press promotion effect).

Following the reach-establishment prompting effect, a first single-press promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to single-press the first effect button 35, and a second single-press promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to single-press the second effect button 36. A reach-establishment success effect (or reach-establishment failure effect) can also be executed depending on whether the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) is single-pressed during the validity period of either of these two single-press promotion effects.

When adopting a configuration in which one of these two single press promotion effects is executed following a reach-establishment prompting effect, it is possible to also adopt a configuration in which, for example, when the second single press promotion effect is executed, the reach-establishment success effect is more likely to be executed (i.e., it is more likely to progress directly to an SPSP reach) than when the first single press promotion effect is executed.

Furthermore, for example, when a reach success effect is executed after a reach completion prompt effect (i.e., when it progresses directly to an SPSP reach), there are times when the first single press prompt effect is executed and times when the second single press prompt effect is executed, whereas it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which when a reach failure effect is executed after a reach completion prompt effect, the first single press prompt effect is always executed and the second single press prompt effect is never executed.

When this configuration is adopted, if the second single-press promotion effect is executed following the reach-achi achievement prompting effect, the reach-achi achievement failure effect will not be executed in response to a single press of the first effect button 35, and the reach-achi achievement success effect will always be executed. As a result, the player can recognize when the second single-press promotion effect begins that the reach-achi achievement success effect will be executed later (i.e., that it will directly develop into an SPSP reach), which effectively increases the player's anticipation of a jackpot game being executed even before the player performs any operation, and can provide strong motivation to the player to operate the second effect button 36.

In addition, this embodiment employs a configuration in which, when a reach-achieved successful effect is executed, it progresses directly to an SPSP reach without passing through a normal reach or an SP reach. For this reason, instead of playback control (see FIG. 15(B)) in which a success-effect-exclusive song different from the SPSP-exclusive song is played in conjunction with the execution of a reach-achieved successful effect, other playback control may be executed, such as playing a portion of the SPSP-exclusive song as a success-effect-exclusive song. When employing a configuration in which such other playback control is executed, it is conceivable to also employ a configuration in which, for example, playback of the SPSP-exclusive song is started in conjunction with the start of a reach-achieved successful effect, playback of the SPSP-exclusive song is interrupted in conjunction with the end of the reach-achieved successful effect, and then playback of the SPSP-exclusive song is resumed in conjunction with the start of an SPSP reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the valid period for the single press promotion effect (see Figures 15(A) and (B)), the execution period for the development effect (see Figure 15(B)), and the execution period for the blackout effect (see Figure 15(B)) are all silent periods, but at least one of these three periods may be an effect sound playback period in which an effect sound is played. However, if the valid period for the single press promotion effect is the effect sound playback period, it is preferable to play an effect sound that has a different melody from the music exclusively for the promotion effect, a different melody from the music exclusively for the success effect, and a different melody from the music exclusively for the failure effect during the valid period. Furthermore, if the execution period for the development effect is the effect sound playback period, it is preferable to play an effect sound that has a different melody from the music exclusively for the success effect, and if the execution period for the blackout effect is the effect sound playback period, it is preferable to play an effect sound that has a different melody from the music exclusively for the SPSP effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SPSP direct development audio data is configured so that when the provocative part and the success part of the SPSP direct development audio data exemplified in FIG. 15 are played consecutively, the melody changes with the start of the success part. The SPSP direct development audio data is configured so that the playback time required to play the provocative part from start to finish is equal to the time from the start to the end of the reach-achi promotion effect. In contrast, in other embodiments, the playback time required to play the provocative part from start to finish may be longer than the time from the start to the end of the reach-achi promotion effect, and music control may be performed such that playback of the provocative part is interrupted midway as the reach-achi promotion effect ends. Performing such music control gives the player the feeling that the music dedicated to the promotion effect has been cut off before reaching a good stopping point (i.e., the melody of the first melody has been interrupted midway), resulting in a more effective notification of the start of the single press promotion effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 15(A), an example is described in which the playback of music dedicated to hype effects and the playback of music dedicated to failure effects are achieved using two pieces of audio data: SPSP direct development audio data and failure audio data. However, in other embodiments, a single piece of audio data consisting of an hype part and a failure part, as illustrated in Figure 15(A), may be prepared, and this single piece of audio data may be used to achieve the playback of music dedicated to hype effects and the playback of music dedicated to failure effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the playback of the music dedicated to the hype effect (an example of a "first melody music") and the music dedicated to the success effect (an example of a "second melody music") are described as an example in which a single piece of sound data, known as SPSP direct development sound data, is used. However, in other embodiments, separate sound data for playing the music dedicated to the hype effect and the music dedicated to the success effect may be prepared, and these pieces of sound data may be output separately from the speaker 38.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is described in which, following the reach-establishment prompting effect, a single press prompting effect is executed as an operation prompting effect, and a reach-establishment success effect (or reach-establishment failure effect) is executed as an operation-responsive effect in response to the player's operation (a single press of the first effect button 35). In contrast, in other embodiments, rather than executing an operation prompting effect after the reach-establishment prompting effect, a reach-establishment success effect (or reach-establishment failure effect) may be executed following the reach-establishment prompting effect (regardless of the player's operation).

In addition, this embodiment describes an example in which, when a reach-achievement success effect is executed, an extension effect and a blackout effect are executed before the SPSP reach is initiated. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the SPSP reach is initiated without executing either or both of these two effects. In other words, the SPSP reach may be executed following the reach-achievement success effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the "first effect" is a reach-establishment inciting effect and the "second effect" is a reach-establishment successful effect, but the "first effect" and "second effect" are not limited to these effects. For example, if it is possible to execute a step-by-step effect that can change gradually up to any step below a predetermined number (for example, "4"), it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the first-stage effect is executed as the "first effect" and the second-stage effect is executed as the "second effect," or a configuration in which the second-stage effect is executed as the "first effect" and the third-stage effect is executed as the "second effect."

So far, we have explained in order the configurations that can be adopted in other embodiments, etc., in relation to the reach-achievement prompting effects, reach-achievement success effects, reach-achievement failure effects, etc., but it goes without saying that these configurations can also be combined as appropriate.

[About the SP Reach Notice and the SPSP Reach Notice]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the SP Reach (see FIG. 8(H)), a battle effect (hereinafter also referred to as a "first half battle effect") is executed in which the player's character fights an enemy character, and different effects are executed depending on the results of this first half battle effect. Specifically, if the player's character ultimately defeats the enemy character in the first half battle effect, a win notification effect (see FIG. 8(G)) is executed at the end of the SP Reach, and if the player's character ultimately loses to the enemy character in the first half battle effect, a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8(G)) is executed at the end of the SP Reach.

In addition, in the first half battle performance, a pinch effect (see, for example, Figure 16 (A)) is executed, showing that the player's character is about to be defeated by the enemy character, and then a rapid-fire promotion effect (see Figures 8 (N) and 16 (C)) may occur, encouraging the player to repeatedly press the first performance button 35. When this rapid-fire promotion effect occurs, an operation-responsive effect in response to the player's rapid pressing of the first performance button 35 will be executed, which will be a rescue failure effect (see Figure 16 (F)) showing that the player fails to rescue their character, or a rescue success effect (see Figure 16 (E)) showing that the player successfully rescues their character. If a rescue failure effect is executed here, the game will not progress to an SPSP reach, and a miss notification effect will be executed at the end of the SP reach (see Figures 8 (N) and (G)). On the other hand, if a successful rescue effect is executed, the SP reach will progress to an SPSP reach, and a win notification effect (or a loss notification effect) will be executed during the SPSP reach (see Figures 8 (I) and (G)).

In this way, when a successful rescue effect is executed and the SP reach develops into an SPSP reach, a battle effect (hereinafter also referred to as a "second half battle effect") is executed during the SPSP reach, in which the player's character, revived by the rescue, fights again against the same enemy character that appeared during the SP reach. If the player's character ultimately defeats the enemy character in the second half battle effect, a win notification effect (see Figure 8 (G)) is executed at the end of the SPSP reach (see Figure 19), and if the player's character ultimately loses to the enemy character in the second half battle effect, a loss notification effect (see Figure 8 (G)) is executed at the end of the SPSP reach.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the execution of the first half battle effect in an SP reach, a preview effect (SP reach preview) is executed using the first suggestive image (see, for example, Figure 16 (E)), and this SP reach preview suggests that a jackpot game may be executed and notifies the player whether or not the game will develop into an SPSP reach. Furthermore, during the execution of the second half battle effect in an SPSP reach, a preview effect (SPSP reach preview) is executed using the above-mentioned first suggestive image and second suggestive image (for example, a weapon held by the player's character: see Figure 19 (B)), and this SPSP reach preview suggests that a jackpot game may be executed.

Below, with reference to Figures 16 and 17, we will explain specific examples of SP reach notifications when the game does not progress to an SPSP reach. Here, Figure 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of an SP reach notification that is performed when a miss notification effect is executed during an SP reach, and Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first suggestion image that is displayed during an SP reach.

<SP Reach notice when it does not develop into SPSP Reach>
For example, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 during normal game play is a "miss" and variation pattern G (see Figure 9 (B)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special pattern, when the first special pattern is displayed in a varying manner according to this variation pattern G, a series of effects illustrated in Figure 16 may be executed.

Figure 16(A) shows an example of a first half battle effect being executed during an SP reach when a reach of four symbols is achieved during the variable display of the first special symbol in the variable pattern G corresponding to the icon (e.g., the red icon) displayed in the icon display area 72. In the first half battle effect, after a display showing repeated offense and defense between the player's character and the enemy character is executed, as shown in Figure 16(A), a pinch effect may be executed showing the player's character being attacked by the enemy character (e.g., a monster) and about to be defeated. Figure 16(A) shows the player's character being attacked by the enemy character, dropping the weapon (here, a sword) he was holding, and about to fall.

When such a pinch effect is performed, an explanatory effect is displayed before the rapid-fire effect described below (see Figure 16 (B)). This explanatory effect explains that if a friend succeeds in rescuing your character, there is a great chance of winning the jackpot. Specifically, a message such as "Save up energy and rescue! A friend appears, a great chance!?" is displayed on the display screen 70, and audio with the same content as this message is output from the speaker 38.

When the above explanatory effect is performed, a valid period begins during which operation of the first effect button 35 is valid, and during this valid period, a rapid-hit promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 35. Figure 16 (C) shows an example of the situation immediately after the rapid-hit promotion effect has begun, and the display screen 70 displays, as effect images for the rapid-hit promotion effect, a first effect button image modeled after the first effect button 35, the word "Repeat!" indicating the operation of the first effect button 35, and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time in the valid period for the rapid-hit promotion effect.

When the first effect button 35 is operated a predetermined number of times (e.g., "2") during the validity period of this rapid-fire promotion effect, a first suggestion image (first suggestion image in its initial display mode: see FIG. 17(A)) that does not include the player's character's allies but shows the white aura that surrounds them is displayed in the center of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 16(D)). The first suggestion image indicates the possibility of a jackpot game being executed and has the function of notifying the player whether or not the game will develop into an SPSP reach. The first suggestion image is an effect image whose display mode can change depending on the rapid pressing of the first effect button 35; the changes in the display mode of the first suggestion image will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 17.

As described above, when variation pattern G (see Figure 9(B)) is selected as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, the following effect display will be performed. That is, if the SP Reach does not progress to an SPSP Reach, the display mode of the first suggestive image will be maintained in response to repeated presses of the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the rapid-hit promotion effect. Figure 16(E) shows an example of the state immediately after the valid period for the rapid-hit promotion effect has ended and the effect image for the rapid-hit promotion effect has been erased. However, if the effect does not progress to an SPSP Reach, the display mode of the first suggestive image will not change from the initial display mode (see Figure 17(A)) even if the number of times the first effect button 35 is pressed during the valid period for the rapid-hit promotion effect increases (see Figures 16(D)-(E)).

In this way, if the display mode of the first suggestive image is maintained in its initial display mode even after the validity period for the rapid-fire promotion effect has expired, a rescue failure effect will be displayed, in which the player's character fails to rescue and falls completely to the ground, with the enemy character walking away (see Figure 16 (F)). When such a rescue failure effect is displayed, three effect symbols (here, "454") indicating a reach miss will pseudo-stop towards the end of the changing display of the first special symbol, and as a miss symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, these effect symbols will stop permanently (see Figures 16 (G) and (H)).

<Display mode of first suggestion image>
As illustrated in Figure 17, the display modes of the first suggestive image include an initial display mode (see Figure 17(A)), a first display mode (see Figure 17(B)), a second display mode (see Figure 17(C)), and a third display mode (see Figure 17(D)). With reference to Figure 16, an example has been described in which the display mode of the first suggestive image does not change from the initial display mode, but there are cases in which the display mode of the first suggestive image changes from the initial display mode to another display mode depending on the number of times the first effect button 35 is repeatedly pressed during the valid period for the rapid-press promotion effect.

Specifically, the display mode of the first suggestion image may change from the initial display mode to the first display mode, or from the initial display mode to the second display mode via the first display mode, or from the initial display mode to the third display mode via the first and second display modes. Furthermore, the display mode of the first suggestion image may change from the initial display mode to the second display mode without passing through the first display mode, or from the initial display mode to the third display mode via the second display mode without passing through the first display mode. Furthermore, the display mode of the first suggestion image may change from the initial display mode to the first display mode and then to the third display mode without passing through the second display mode, or from the initial display mode to the third display mode without passing through the first and second display modes.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, for each change pattern of the display mode of the first suggestive image, information indicating the number of operations that determines the timing of the change in display mode is stored in the sub-ROM 92. For example, for a change pattern in which the display mode of the first suggestive image is changed in the order of from the initial display mode to the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, information indicating the first number of operations (e.g., 5 times), the second number of operations (e.g., 10 times), and the third number of operations (e.g., 15 times) is stored in the sub-ROM 92. In response to this, the sub-CPU 91 counts the number of times the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for the rapid-fire promotion effect based on the operation information (operation signal) output from the first effect button detection sensor 96 (see Figure 5), and changes the display mode of the first suggestion image from the initial display mode to the first display mode when the counted number of operations reaches the first number of operations, changes the display mode of the first suggestion image from the first display mode to the second display mode when the counted number of operations reaches the second number of operations, and changes the display mode of the first suggestion image from the second display mode to the third display mode when the counted number of operations reaches the third number of operations.

On the other hand, as described above with reference to Figure 16, when the display mode of the first suggestion image is maintained in its initial display mode, the number of operations as described above is not stored, so the display mode of the first suggestion image does not change.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, presentation control is performed to change the display mode of the first suggestion image (or presentation control to maintain the display mode of the first suggestion image in its initial display mode) based on the number of times the first presentation button 35 is operated during the valid period for the rapid-hit promotion presentation.However, when changing the display mode of the first suggestion image, it is also possible to perform presentation control such that each time the first presentation button 35 is operated, a presentation lottery is held to determine whether or not to change the display mode of the first suggestion image, and the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed on the condition that this presentation lottery is won.

By controlling the effects in this way, even if the change pattern that changes the display mode of the first suggestion image is the same, the display mode of the first suggestion image will change at different times, thereby increasing the number of ways in which the display mode of the first suggestion image can change, and effectively increasing the interest of the rapid-fire effect that changes the display mode of the first suggestion image.

The change pattern of the display mode of the first suggestive image is set by the sub-CPU 91 based on the results of the first special pattern determination by the main CPU 81 at the start of the variable display of the first special pattern when the SP Reach notification is executed. However, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period for the rapid-hit promotion effect, the following effect control will be performed.

For example, if a change pattern is set in which the display mode of the first suggestive image changes from the initial display mode to the first display mode, the second display mode, and then the third display mode, the sub-CPU 91 will maintain the display mode of the first suggestive image in the initial display mode during the valid period for the rapid-fire promotion effect, because the number of operations does not even reach the first number of operations. Then, at the end of this valid period, the display mode of the first suggestive image will change from the initial display mode to the third display mode (without passing through the first and second display modes).

In this way, if no operation is performed during the valid period for the rapid-fire promotion effect, the display mode of the first suggestive image will change directly from the initial display mode to the final display mode determined by the preset change pattern when the valid period ends.

(Features of the first suggestion image in the initial display mode)
Next, the features of each display mode of the first suggestion image will be described with reference to FIG.
The first suggestive image in the initial display mode (see FIG. 17(A)) has the following characteristics. That is, as also exemplified in FIG. 16, the first suggestive image in the initial display mode is an effect image that does not include any companion characters who are companions of the player's character (number of companion characters: "0"), and only shows the white aura that surrounds the player's character's companions. Because this first suggestive image in the initial display mode is an effect image that indicates that no companion characters have appeared to rescue the player's character, it has the characteristic that if the initial display mode becomes the final display mode of the first suggestive image, it will not develop into an SPSP reach.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the first half battle effect during an SP reach progresses to the second half battle effect during an SPSP reach, a weapon strengthening effect (see Figures 18(H)-(I), 19(A)-(B)) is performed in which the weapon (an example of the second suggestive image) used by the player's character to fight the enemy character is strengthened using the first suggestive image as an SPSP reach notice in the second half battle effect. However, if the initial display mode becomes the final display mode of the first suggestive image, the game does not progress to an SPSP reach as described above, and therefore the weapon strengthening effect is not performed (see Figure 17(A)).

(Features of the first suggestion image in the first display mode)
The first suggestion image in the first display mode (see FIG. 17(B)) has the following characteristics.
That is, the first suggestive image of the first display mode is an effect image that includes one companion character who is a companion of the player's character (number of companion characters: "1") and shows that the companion character is surrounded by a blue aura. Because the first suggestive image of this first display mode is an effect image that indicates that one companion character has appeared to rescue the player's character, when the first display mode becomes the final display mode of the first suggestive image, it has the characteristic that it will always progress from an SP reach to an SPSP reach, that is, from a first half battle effect to a second half battle effect.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if at least one friend character appears in response to operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the rapid-fire promotion effect, the effect will always progress to an SPSP Reach (second-half battle effect); it is configured so that the appearance of a friend character will not result in the effect not progressing to an SPSP Reach. Therefore, when the display mode of the first suggestive image changes from the initial display mode to the first display mode, the development to an SPSP Reach becomes highly likely (see FIG. 17(B)). This is also true when the first suggestive image in the second display mode (see FIG. 17(C)) or the first suggestive image in the third display mode (see FIG. 17(D)) is displayed; it can be said that an effect that displays the first suggestive image in any of the first to third display modes functions as a definitive notification effect that definitively notifies development to an SPSP Reach (second-half battle effect).

Returning to the explanation of the first suggestive image in the first display mode in Figure 17 (B), if the second half of the battle performance progresses while the first suggestive image is displayed, a weapon strengthening performance is performed in which the weapon used by the player's character to fight the enemy character is strengthened using the first suggestive image.However, if the first suggestive image being displayed is the first suggestive image in the first display mode (a performance image showing one allied character surrounded by a blue aura), the degree of weapon strengthening is characteristically small. Specifically, when a weapon strengthening effect is performed using the first suggestion image in the first display mode, the first suggestion image in the first display mode moves to the white dagger (which the player's character was also holding during the first half of the battle effect) (see FIG. 16(A)), as shown in FIGS. 18(H)-(I), and then, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the first suggestion image injects energy into the white dagger, transforming it into a medium sword that is the same blue as the first suggestion image in the first display mode and is larger than the dagger, resulting in a weapon strengthening effect (see FIG. 17(B)).

(Features of the first suggestion image in the second display mode)
The first suggestion image in the second display mode (see FIG. 17(C)) has the following characteristics.
That is, the first suggestive image of the second display mode includes two companion characters who are companions of the player's character (number of companion characters: "2"), and is an effect image that shows the two companion characters surrounded by a green aura. Because this first suggestive image of the second display mode is an effect image that indicates the appearance of two companion characters who will rescue the player's character, if the second display mode becomes the final display mode of the first suggestive image, the first half battle effect will necessarily progress to the second half battle effect. In other words, when the first suggestive image of the second display mode is displayed, it is highly likely that the effect will progress to an SPSP reach (second half battle effect).

Furthermore, if the second half of the battle is initiated while the first suggestive image is displayed, a weapon strengthening effect is performed in which the player's character's weapon used to fight the enemy character is strengthened using the first suggestive image. However, if the first suggestive image being displayed is the first suggestive image of the second display mode (a display image depicting two allied characters surrounded by a green aura), the degree of weapon strengthening is characterized as being moderate. Specifically, when a weapon strengthening effect is performed using the first suggestive image of the second display mode, the first suggestive image of the second display mode moves to the white dagger (which the player's character was also holding during the first half of the battle) (see FIG. 16(A)), as shown in FIGS. 18(H)-(I). Then, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the first suggestive image injects energy into the white dagger, transforming it into a large sword that is the same green as the first suggestive image of the second display mode and is larger than the dagger or medium sword (see FIG. 17(C)).

(Features of the first suggestion image in the third display mode)
The first suggestion image in the third display mode (see FIG. 17(D)) has the following characteristics.
That is, the first suggestive image of the third display mode includes three companion characters who are allies of the player's character (number of companion characters: "3"), and is an effect image that shows the three companion characters surrounded by a red aura. Because this first suggestive image of the third display mode is an effect image that indicates the appearance of three companion characters who will rescue the player's character, if the third display mode becomes the final display mode of the first suggestive image, the first half battle effect will necessarily progress to the second half battle effect. In other words, when the first suggestive image of the third display mode is displayed, it is highly likely that the game will progress to an SPSP reach (second half battle effect).

Furthermore, as described above, if the second half of the battle is initiated while the first suggestive image is displayed, a weapon strengthening effect is performed in which the weapon used by the player's character to fight the enemy character is strengthened using the first suggestive image. However, if the first suggestive image being displayed is the first suggestive image of the third display mode (a display image depicting three allied characters surrounded by a red aura), the degree of weapon strengthening is greater. Specifically, when a weapon strengthening effect is performed using the first suggestive image of the third display mode, the first suggestive image of the third display mode moves to the white dagger (which the player's character was also carrying during the first half of the battle) (see Figures 18(H)-(I)), and the first suggestive image injects energy into the white dagger (see Figure 19(A)), transforming the white dagger into a ray gun that is the same red as the first suggestive image of the third display mode and has greater attack power than the dagger, medium sword, or great sword (see Figure 17(C) and Figures 19(A)-(B)).

(Comparison of the initial display mode, the first display mode to the third display mode)
As explained above with reference to FIG. 17 , in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the display mode of the first suggestive image does not change from the initial display mode, the game does not progress to an SPSP reach, but if the final display mode of the first suggestive image is one of the first to third display modes, the game always progresses to an SPSP reach. Furthermore, while the first suggestive image in the initial display mode does not show a companion character, the first suggestive image in the first to third display modes shows at least one companion character. Therefore, the player can easily recognize whether or not the game will progress to an SPSP reach based on whether or not a companion character is shown in the final first suggestive image.

Furthermore, with regard to the display color of the first suggestive image in each display mode, the aura indicated by the first suggestive image in the initial display mode, which suggests that an SPSP reach will not develop, is white, whereas the aura indicated by the first suggestive image in the first display mode is blue, the aura indicated by the first suggestive image in the second display mode is green, and the aura indicated by the first suggestive image in the third display mode is red (see FIG. 17). When a first suggestive image in any of the first to third display modes is displayed among these first suggestive images, it will inevitably develop into an SPSP reach. Therefore, the effects displaying these first suggestive images function as advance notice effects that suggest that a jackpot game may be executed and that the likelihood of this is relatively high. Therefore, players can easily determine whether or not a jackpot game is executed based on whether or not the display color of the first suggestive image is white.

Furthermore, the initial display mode and the first to third display modes have the following characteristics. That is, when the result of the first special pattern determination made at the start of the variable display of the first special pattern that executes the SP Reach notification is "jackpot," the final display modes of the first suggestive image, when arranged in order from highest to lowest selection rate, are the third display mode, the second display mode, the first display mode, and the initial display mode. Also, when the result of the first special pattern determination made at the start of the variable display of the first special pattern that executes the SP Reach notification is "miss," the final display modes of the first suggestive image, when arranged in order from highest to lowest selection rate, are the initial display mode, the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode.

For this reason, the SP reach preview in which the display mode of the first suggestive image eventually changes to the third display mode has the highest jackpot reliability, the SP reach preview in which the display mode of the first suggestive image eventually changes to the second display mode has the next highest jackpot reliability, the SP reach preview in which the display mode of the first suggestive image eventually changes to the first display mode has the next highest jackpot reliability, and the SP reach preview in which the display mode of the first suggestive image does not change from the initial display mode has the lowest jackpot reliability.The player can easily recognize the jackpot reliability (i.e., the likelihood that the jackpot notification effect will be executed and a jackpot game will be played) based on the number of companion characters and the color of the aura indicated by the first suggestive image.

(About weapons after the weapon strengthening animation)
While the jackpot reliability of the first suggestive image in the first to third display modes is as described above, the following can be said about the second suggestive image showing the weapon after the weapon strengthening effect. That is, when a weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestive image in the first display mode, a second suggestive image showing a medium sword is displayed in blue, which is the same color as the aura shown by the first suggestive image. Furthermore, when a weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestive image in the second display mode, a second suggestive image showing a great sword is displayed in green, which is the same color as the aura shown by the second suggestive image. Furthermore, when a weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestive image in the third display mode, a second suggestive image showing a ray gun is displayed in red, which is the same color as the aura shown by the third suggestive image. In this way, the second suggestive image representing the blue medium sword corresponds to the first suggestive image of the first display mode, the second suggestive image representing the green large sword corresponds to the first suggestive image of the second display mode, and the second suggestive image representing the red ray gun corresponds to the first suggestive image of the third display mode, so the relationship in the reliability of a jackpot between the second suggestive image representing the medium sword, the second suggestive image representing the large sword, and the second suggestive image representing the ray gun is the same as that of the first suggestive images of the first to third display modes described above.

In other words, the SPSP reach-in-progression preview in which a second suggestive image depicting a red ray gun is displayed has the highest jackpot reliability, the SPSP reach-in-progression preview in which a second suggestive image depicting a green great sword is displayed has the next highest jackpot reliability, and the SPSP reach-in-progression preview in which a second suggestive image depicting a blue medium sword is displayed has the lowest jackpot reliability. Players can easily determine the jackpot reliability based on the type of weapon shown in the second suggestive image and its display color.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, after the weapon strengthening effect is executed, the second suggestion image is displayed instead of the first suggestion image. Therefore, until the weapon strengthening effect is executed, the player can recognize the likelihood of a jackpot based on the display mode of the first suggestion image, and after the weapon strengthening effect is executed, the player can recognize the likelihood of a jackpot based on the display mode of the second suggestion image.

<SP Reach Notice and SPSP Reach Notice when it develops into SPSP Reach>
Next, with reference to Figures 18 and 19, we will explain specific examples of the SP Reach notice, which ultimately changes the display mode of the first suggestive image to the third display mode, and the SPSP Reach notice, which changes the player's character's weapon to a ray gun that has the same display color as the first suggestive image in the third display mode. Here, Figures 18 and 19 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the SP Reach notice and the SPSP Reach notice that are performed when the SP Reach develops into the SPSP Reach. Note that here, the result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, in which the SP Reach notice and the SPSP Reach notice are executed, is a "jackpot," and the variation pattern E (see Figure 9 (A)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of the first suggestive image is set to change the display mode of the first suggestive image from the initial display mode to the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode in that order.

Note that the effects that take place before the rapid-fire prompt effect in the first half of the battle effect begins are the same as those described above with reference to Figures 16 (A) and (B), so here we will explain the effects that take place after the rapid-fire prompt effect begins.

Figure 18(A) illustrates the situation immediately after the rapid-hit promotion effect is initiated during the first half battle effect, in the same manner as described above with reference to Figure 16(C), when a reach is achieved with the 7 symbol. After the rapid-hit promotion effect that encourages the player to rapidly hit the first effect button 35 is initiated, if the number of times the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period of the rapid-hit promotion effect reaches "2," the first suggestive image (see Figure 17(A)) in its initial display mode is displayed in the center of the display screen 70 (see Figure 18(B)), as described above with reference to Figure 16(D).

After that, when the number of times the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for the rapid-fire promotion effect reaches a first number of operations (e.g., 5 times), the first suggestion image in the initial display mode changes to the first suggestion image in the first display mode (see Figures 18(B) and (C)). Then, when the first effect button 35 is further operated and the number of times the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period reaches a second number of operations (e.g., 10 times), the first suggestion image in the first display mode changes to the first suggestion image in the second display mode. Furthermore, when the number of times the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period reaches a third number of operations (e.g., 15 times), the first suggestion image in the second display mode changes to the first suggestion image in the third display mode (see Figure 18(D)).

In Figure 18, the first suggestion image of the first display mode is illustrated in Figure 18(C), and the first suggestion image of the third display mode is illustrated in Figure 18(D), and the first suggestion image of the second display mode displayed between these suggestion images is omitted from the illustration.

As illustrated in Figure 18 (D), after the first suggestion image of the third display mode is displayed, when the valid period for the rapid-fire promotion effect expires, the display of the effect image for the rapid-fire promotion effect ends, and a successful rescue effect is displayed, showing the player's character being revived with the help of the three allied characters shown in the first suggestion image of the third display mode (see Figure 18 (E)).

Note that Figures 18(D) and (E) show an example in which, in order to emphasize that the player's character has been revived, the first suggestion image in the third display mode is reduced in size and moved to the lower right area of the display screen 70, and the revived player's character is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 created by this movement of the first suggestion image; however, a successful rescue effect showing the player's character being revived may also be executed, while maintaining at least one of the size and display area of the three companion characters and auras represented by the first suggestion image in the third display mode.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 18(E), when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the successful rescue performance, the SP reach (first half battle performance) progresses to the SPSP reach (second half battle performance) (see Figures 18(E) and (F)). Figure 18(F) shows an example of the progression to the second half battle performance, in which the revived player's character brandishes a short sword and confronts a reappearing enemy character. In this way, when the second half battle performance begins, an offense and defense performance is performed, depicting repeated offense and defense between the player's character and the enemy character (see Figure 18(G)).

After that, as the offensive and defensive effects are performed and the second half of the battle effect nears its end, a weapon strengthening effect is performed using the first suggestive image (here, the first suggestive image in the third display mode: see FIG. 17(D)) (see FIGS. 18(H)-(I), 19(A)-(B)). Specifically, first, a movement effect display is executed in which the first suggestive image, which has changed to the third display mode, moves toward the second suggestive image representing the short sword held by the player's character (see FIGS. 18(H)-(I)).

Note that Figures 18(H) to (I) illustrate an example in which the first suggestion image shrinks and moves toward the second suggestion image representing a stiletto, but it is also possible to execute a movement effect display in which the first suggestion image moves toward the second suggestion image without changing the display mode (here, size) of the first suggestion image. Also, here, an example is described in which the first suggestion image that has changed to the third display mode moves toward the second suggestion image, but a similar movement effect display is also executed when the first suggestion image that has changed to the first display mode moves toward the second suggestion image, or when the first suggestion image that has changed to the second display mode moves toward the second suggestion image.

As described above, when the first suggestion image representing three allied characters with red auras reaches the second suggestion image representing a dagger through a movement effect display that moves the first suggestion image (here, the first suggestion image in the third display mode) toward the second suggestion image, an effect display is executed showing energy being injected into the dagger from the three allied characters (see Figure 19 (A)), and then a change effect display is executed showing the dagger held by the player's character transform into the same red ray gun as the three allied characters (see Figures 19 (A) and (B)).

Here, we will explain an example in which a transformation effect display is executed using the first suggestion image of the third display mode. However, when a weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestion image of the first display mode (see FIG. 17(B)), a transformation effect display is executed in which a single allied character surrounded by a blue aura injects energy into a short sword, and then a transformation effect display is executed in which the short sword held by the player's character transforms into a medium sword of the same blue color as that held by one of the allied characters. When a weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestion image of the second display mode (see FIG. 17(C)), a transformation effect display is executed in which a single allied character surrounded by a green aura injects energy into a short sword, and then a transformation effect display is executed in which the short sword held by the player's character transforms into a large sword of the same green color as that held by the two allied characters.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 19, when the short sword held by the player's character changes into a red ray gun, a final attack effect is executed, showing the player's character launching a final attack using the ray gun (see Figure 19 (C)). Here, the weapon used in the final attack has changed to the ray gun, which has the highest attack power among the medium sword, great sword, and ray gun, and its display color is red. Therefore, based on the type of weapon held by the player's character (here, the ray gun) and its display color (here, red), the player can easily recognize that there is a relatively high possibility that the player's character will defeat the enemy character and a winning notification effect will be executed.

Figure 19 (D) shows an example of a defeat effect in which the player's character hits an enemy character with an attack using a ray gun, defeating the enemy character. When a defeat effect is executed, three effect symbols representing a double number (here, "777") are pseudo-stopped toward the end of the first special symbol's variable display, and then a win notification effect is executed in which these three effect symbols actually stop as a jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol (see Figures 19 (E)-(F)).

In this case, because variation pattern E (see Figure 9(A)), which is selected when the result of the first special pattern determination is a "jackpot," is selected, a defeat effect and a win notification effect are executed after the final attack effect. However, if variation pattern J (see Figure 9(B)), which is selected when the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" (corresponding to variation pattern E), is selected, a defeat effect (an effect showing the player's character being defeated by the enemy character in retaliation) is executed after the final attack effect, and then a miss notification effect is executed in which the three effect patterns indicating a miss are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice)
So far, we have explained the SP reach notification and SPSP reach notification executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment with reference to Figures 16 to 19, but such a gaming machine 1 can be considered as a gaming machine as follows.

a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31: see FIG. 5);
a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the big prize opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. 28) that executes the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
Based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination), a first suggestive image (for example, see FIG. 17(A)) suggesting that the special game may be executed, and a second suggestive image (for example, a performance image showing a weapon held by the player's character: see FIGS. 18(F) to 18(G)) suggesting that the special game different from the first suggestive image may be executed, can be displayed;
a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the first suggestive image from a first display mode suggesting that the possibility is at a first degree (for example, an initial display mode exemplified in FIG. 17(A)) to a second display mode suggesting that the possibility is at a second degree higher than the first degree (for example, any of the first, second, and third display modes exemplified in FIGS. 17(B) to (D)), and then changes the display mode of the second suggestive image (for example, the type of weapon possessed by the player's character and its display color) to a corresponding display mode that corresponds to the second display mode of the first suggestive image (for example, changing to a weapon of a color that is the same as the color of the aura represented by the first suggestive image: see FIGS. 18(H) to (I) and FIGS. 19(A) to (B)).

With this gaming machine, after the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the second display mode, the display mode of the second suggestive image changes to a corresponding display mode that corresponds to the second display mode (see, for example, Figures 18(B)-(D), 18(H)-(I), and 19(A)-(B)). In this way, the possibility of a special game being executed is suggested by both the display effect that changes the display mode of the first suggestive image and the display effect that changes the display mode of the second suggestive image, and the synergistic effect of these display effects can increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a special game, making it possible to achieve a high presentation effect. Furthermore, because the display modes of both the first suggestive image and the second suggestive image after the change suggest the possibility of a special game being executed, there is an advantage in that it is easier for the player to recognize that a special game may be executed, compared to when the display mode of only one of the suggestive images is changed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, which is capable of executing SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice, can also be regarded as a gaming machine as follows.
The device is provided with an input means (for example, a first effect button 35) that can be input by a player,
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of inputs to the input means reaches a predetermined number (for example, the first number of operations: 5 times), the display mode of the first suggestive image is changed from the first display mode (for example, the initial display mode illustrated in Figure 17(A)) to the second display mode (for example, the first display mode illustrated in Figure 17(B)).

With this gaming machine, the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the second display mode when a predetermined number of inputs are made to the input means. This motivates players who want to know the likelihood of a special game being executed to make an input to the input means, and easily and effectively prevents problems such as insufficient presentation effects due to a lack of input to the input means.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, which is capable of executing SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice, can also be regarded as a gaming machine as follows.
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, before changing the display mode of the second suggestive image to the corresponding display mode (for example, before executing the change display mode illustrated in Figures 19(A) to (B)), a movement display (for example, see Figures 18(H) to (I)) is executed to move the first suggestive image that has changed to the second display mode toward the second suggestive image.

With this gaming machine, before the display mode of the second suggestive image changes to the corresponding display mode, a movement effect display is executed in which the first suggestive image, which has changed to the second display mode, moves toward the second suggestive image (see, for example, Figures 18(H)-(I) and 19(A)-(B)). This makes it possible to easily guide the gaze of a player who has been watching the display mode of the first suggestive image change from the first display mode to the second display mode, to the second suggestive image, thereby effectively improving the effect of the display effect that changes the display mode of the second suggestive image to the corresponding display mode (for example, the change effect display exemplified in Figures 19(A)-(B)).

(Other configurations related to SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice)
The following configuration may be adopted for the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice.
That is, in this embodiment, an example is described in which a movement effect display (see, for example, FIGS. 18(H) to 18(I)) is executed to move the first suggestion image whose display form has changed toward the second suggestion image before changing the display form of the second suggestion image representing the weapon possessed by the player's character to a corresponding display form that corresponds to the display form of the first suggestion image after the change. In contrast to this, in other embodiments, the display form of the second suggestion image may be changed to the corresponding display form without executing such a movement effect display.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed from the initial display mode to the first display mode when the first effect button 35 is operated a first number of times (e.g., 5 times) during the valid period of the rapid-hit promotion effect; the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when the first effect button 35 is operated a second number of times (e.g., 10 times) during the valid period of the rapid-hit promotion effect; and the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed from the second display mode to the third display mode when the first effect button 35 is operated a third number of times (e.g., 15 times) during the valid period of the rapid-hit promotion effect. In contrast, in other embodiments, the rapid-hit promotion effect that encourages the player to rapidly hit the first effect button 35 may not be executed, and the display mode of the first suggestion image may be changed as described above with reference to FIG. 17 regardless of the player's input to the input means (in this embodiment, operation of the first effect button 35).

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which a change effect (for example, the rapid-fire effect exemplified in Figures 18(B) to (D)) that changes the display mode of the first suggestive image from the initial display mode to another display mode is executed during an SP reach, but in other embodiments, such a change effect may be executed during a reach effect other than an SP reach (for example, during a normal reach or an SPSP reach), or may be executed when no reach effect is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which a change effect (for example, the change effect display illustrated in Figures 19(A) to (B)) that changes the display mode of the second suggestive image to a corresponding display mode is executed during an SPSP reach, but in other embodiments, such a change effect display may be executed during a reach effect other than an SPSP reach (for example, during a normal reach or SP reach), or may be executed when no reach effect is being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the change effect that changes the display mode of the first suggestion image from the initial display mode to another display mode, an example has been described in which both the display content and display color of the display object represented by the first suggestion image are changed. However, change effects are not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute a change effect that changes only the display content (in this embodiment, the number of companion characters) without changing the display color of the display object, or to execute a change effect that changes only the display color of the display object without changing the display content.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the change effect that changes the display mode of the second suggestive image to a corresponding display mode, an example has been described in which both the display content and display color of the display object represented by the second suggestive image (in this embodiment, the weapon held by the player's character) are changed. However, change effects are not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute a change effect that changes only the display content (in this embodiment, the type of weapon) without changing the display color of the display object, or to execute a change effect that changes only the display color of the display object (in this embodiment, the color of the weapon) without changing the display content of the display object.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the first suggestive image is an effect image that represents at least the aura that surrounds a companion character, but the display object represented by the first suggestive image is not limited to an aura and may be something else (for example, an item). Further, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the second suggestive image is an effect image that represents a weapon, but the display object represented by the second suggestive image is not limited to a weapon and may be something else (for example, a character).

[Music playback control in high bass states]
Next, music playback control in the high-base state will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 22. Here, Figure 20 is a screen diagram illustrating a music selection screen. Figure 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the music selection in the probability variable game state and the time-saving game state (following the probability variable game state). Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control related to music playback.

As described above with reference to Figure 6 (B), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the 3R probability variable A jackpot symbol X1 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41 during normal game play, a jackpot game is executed, including a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are long-open. If the game ball enters the V prize during this long-open round game (see Figure 7 (B)), game play is controlled in a probability variable game state that can continue for a period (an example of a "first period," hereinafter also referred to as the "probability variable game period") in which probability variable games are executed up to 100 times (an example of a "first number of times"). If the result of the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) in each of these 100 times of probability variable play is a "miss," the game is controlled in a time-limited play state that can continue for a period (an example of a "second period," hereinafter also referred to as the "time-limited play period") in which time-limited play is executed up to 100 times (an example of a "second number of times") (see FIG. 7(H)). This also applies when the result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variable play state (or time-limited play state) is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot that occurs is a "10R probability variable A" or "3R probability variable B" (a jackpot with 100 STs and 100 time-limited play) as exemplified in FIG. 6(C).

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 executes music playback control to play a predetermined song using the speaker 38 during the variable probability game period and the time-saving game period. While the predetermined song is being played and the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, the player can perform a predetermined operation to change the music being played as desired.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a cross key consisting of an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key located adjacent to the first effect button 35. Furthermore, in addition to the first effect button detection sensor 96 and the second effect button detection sensor 97, a key operation detection sensor that detects the operation of the cross key is connected to the sub-control board 90. When a player operates any key on the cross key (up key, down key, left key, or right key), a detection signal notifying the sub-control board 90 that a key operation has been detected is output from the key operation detection sensor to the sub-control board 90. At that time, different detection signals are output depending on whether the up key, down key, left key, or right key is operated. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 can determine which of the four keys was operated based on the detection signal from the key operation detection sensor.

This cross key can be used to change the effects performed on the gaming machine 1. For example, when a specific song is being played during the probability variation game period (or the time-saving game period),
The volume can be increased by one level by operating the up key, and decreased by one level by operating the down key, and during a period when the music being played can be changed, the music being played can be changed to another music by operating the left or right key.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 allows the player to freely select the music to be played during the special probability game period and the time-saving game period, but is configured so that the player cannot select the music to be played when gameplay is controlled in the normal game state, or when the time-saving game state (see Figures 7 (D) and (E)), which is the same game state as the time-saving game period but is entered after the end of a jackpot game related to 3R normal (see Figure 6 (B)), is over.

Figure 20 (A) illustrates an example of an effect image displayed on the display screen 70 when a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol during the probability variable play period (or time-limited play period), and Figure 20 (B) illustrates an example of an effect image displayed on the display screen 70 during the variable display of the second special symbol during the probability variable play period (or time-limited play period).

During both the probability variable play period and the time-limited play period, the base state is high, making it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22. For this reason, during the probability variable play period and the time-limited play period, a right-hit promotion image consisting of a right-pointing arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 to encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, aiming at the gate 25 and the second starting hole 22 (see Figures 20 (A) and (B)).

Furthermore, during the probability variation play period and the time-limited play period, unless the game is in a so-called waiting state, a predetermined song will be played regardless of whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, during the probability variation play period and the time-limited play period, information indicating the song being played (hereinafter also referred to as "song information") is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, with the song title of the song being played and the name of the singer who sings that song displayed side by side (see Figures 20(A) and (B)). Note that Figures 20(A) and (B) show an example of a state in which the song information regarding the song being played displays the words "Time of Battle" as the song title of the song being played and the words "Strong Warrior X" as the name of the singer of that song.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, while a song is being played, song information indicating that song is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70. However, if the song being played is changed to another song, the song information will also be changed. That is, for example, if the song being played is changed from song X-1 to song X-2, the displayed song information for song X-1 will scroll in a predetermined direction from the upper left area and disappear from the display screen 70, and the newly appeared song information for song X-2 will scroll in the same direction as the song information for song X-1 and move to the upper left area where the song information for song X-1 was displayed, resulting in a song information change display.

By the way, when a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 during a probability variation play period or a time-limited play period, the display screen 70 displays three effect symbols indicating a loss in their actual stopped state. Therefore, when the player sees the effect symbols actually stopped, they can easily recognize that the second special symbol has stopped without looking at the second special symbol display 42.

However, even if the three effect symbols are displayed in a stopped state as described above, if the music information change display is displayed as described above, the effect symbols will remain stopped, but other effect images (here, the music information) will change, so a player who sees the music information change display instead of the effect symbols may mistakenly believe that the second special symbol is being displayed in a changing state.

For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, while the second special symbol (or first special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner during the probability variation period or the time-limited play period, the music being played is changed to another music in response to the operation of the left or right key on the directional pad, but while the second special symbol (and first special symbol) is displayed stationary during the probability variation period or the time-limited play period, the change of the music being played is restricted (i.e., the music being played will not be changed to another music even if the left or right key is operated).

In this way, while the second special symbol (or first special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner during the probability variation play period or the time-saving play period, the player can change the music being played at will. Therefore, on the left and right sides of the music information displayed on the display screen 70, a left key image imitating the left key and a right key image imitating the right key are displayed in high brightness (see Figure 20 (B)). Therefore, a player who sees the left and right key images can easily recognize that they can change the music being played by operating the left or right key.

On the other hand, while the second special symbol (and first special symbol) is displayed in a stopped state during the probability variation play period or the time-limited play period, left and right key images with lower brightness are displayed on both the left and right sides of the music information displayed on the display screen 70 (see Figure 20 (A)). Therefore, based on the reduced brightness of the left and right key images, the player can easily recognize that operating the left and right keys is invalid and that operating them will not change the music being played.

<About the presentation mode during the probability game period>
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three presentation modes, namely presentation mode A, presentation mode B, and presentation mode C, are provided as presentation modes for the variable presentations and preview presentations that are performed during the special rate play period, and by changing the presentation mode, for example, the display mode of the presentation pattern, the type of preview presentation, the type of background image displayed on the display screen 70, etc. will change.

In contrast, during the ending period of the jackpot game, which occurs immediately before the start of the probability variation game period, a mode selection prompt is executed to prompt the player to select one of the presentation modes A, B, or C. The player can select any of the presentation modes A, B, or C by operating the first presentation button 35 during the valid period associated with the mode selection prompt. While not shown in the figure, when this mode selection prompt is executed, a mode A image representing presentation mode A, a mode B image representing presentation mode B, and a mode C image representing presentation mode C are displayed on the display screen 70, with the cursor positioned on one of these three mode images. For example, when the cursor is positioned on the mode A image, if the player operates the first presentation button 35 once during the valid period, the cursor moves from the mode A image to the mode B image. Furthermore, when the cursor is positioned on the mode C image, if the player operates the first presentation button 35 once during the valid period, the cursor moves from the mode C image to the mode A image. Then, the mode image on which the cursor is positioned when the valid period for the mode selection prompt effect ends is determined to be the mode image indicating the effect mode selected by the player, and the effect mode during the probability variation play period to which the effect transitions after the jackpot play ends is ultimately set to the effect mode corresponding to the mode image on which the cursor was positioned.

The mode selection prompt effect starts with the cursor positioned on the Mode A image. Therefore, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period of the mode selection prompt effect, the valid period will end with the cursor positioned on the Mode A image. When the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to the special probability game period, the variable effect will start in the effect mode A corresponding to the Mode A image.

In addition, with the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, while the second special symbol (or first special symbol) is being displayed in a variable probability play period, the player can change the presentation mode to another presentation mode by operating the first presentation button 35. For example, if the player operates the first presentation button 35 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable probability play period and a variable presentation is being performed in presentation mode A, the presentation mode will change from presentation mode A to presentation mode B as the next variable presentation of the second special symbol begins.

In the variable presentation pattern setting process (step S163 in FIG. 43) that sets the presentation pattern for variable presentations during the probability variable play period or time-limited play period, the variable presentation pattern selection table stored in the sub-ROM 92 is referenced. In this embodiment, these variable presentation pattern selection tables are a variable presentation pattern selection table for presentation mode A, a variable presentation pattern selection table for presentation mode B, and a variable presentation pattern selection table for presentation mode C. When a presentation mode is set during the probability variable play period or time-limited play period, mode information indicating the currently set presentation mode is stored in the sub-RAM 93. The sub-CPU 91 references one of the three variable presentation pattern selection tables corresponding to the presentation mode indicated by the mode information, selects one variable presentation pattern, and stores information indicating the selected variable presentation pattern in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the variable presentation.

In addition, in the preview effect pattern setting process (processing of step S164 in FIG. 43) that sets the preview effect pattern during the probability variable play period and the time-limited play period, the preview effect pattern selection table stored in the sub-ROM 92 is referenced, and in this embodiment, the preview effect pattern selection tables stored are a preview effect pattern selection table for presentation mode A, a preview effect pattern selection table for presentation mode B, and a preview effect pattern selection table for presentation mode C. The sub-CPU 91 references the preview effect pattern selection table corresponding to the presentation mode indicated by the mode information stored in the sub-RAM 93 from among the three preview effect pattern selection tables, selects one preview effect pattern, and stores information indicating the selected preview effect pattern in the sub-RAM 93 as preview effect setting information.

Then, at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) during the probability variable play period or the time-limited play period, the sub-CPU 91 sends a variable display start command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) that includes information indicating the selected variable display pattern and information indicating the selected preview display pattern. In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120) executes processing based on the received variable display start command, thereby realizing variable displays and preview displays according to the set display mode.

<About the types of songs available for selection>
Next, the selectable music that can be selected by the player will be explained. Figure 21 (A) shows an example of the selectable music that can be selected by the player during the probability variable game period, and Figure 21 (B) shows an example of the selectable music that can be selected by the player during the time-saving game period that follows the probability variable game period.

(Regarding the selectable music that players can choose during the probability variation game period)
21(A), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, nine songs, namely, song X-1, song X-2, song X-3, song X-4, song X-5, song X-6, song X-7, song X-8, and song X-9, are prepared as selectable songs that can be selected by a player during the probability variable game period. That is, the sound ROM 108 stores sound data for playing song X-1, sound data for playing song X-2, sound data for playing song X-3, sound data for playing song X-4, sound data for playing song X-5, sound data for playing song X-6, sound data for playing song X-7, sound data for playing song X-8, and sound data for playing song X-9.

When music is being played during the probability variable play period (and time-limited play period), information indicating the music being played (playing music information) is stored in the control RAM 103 (see Figure 5). Conversely, if the left or right key on the directional pad is operated while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable probability play period (or time-limited play period), an operation command notifying this is sent by the sub-CPU 91 to the image and sound control board 100. Based on this operation command, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 updates the playing music information stored in the control RAM 103 and also updates the music information displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70. The image and sound control CPU 101 then reads the sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 to SDRAM 109 to play the music identified based on the information indicating the music being played, and executes data processing on the read data. It then instructs the sound DSP 107 to output the processed sound data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). This changes the music being played to the music selected by operating the left or right key.

(Regarding music playback immediately after transitioning to the probability game period)
In addition, immediately after the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to the probability variable game period, the player has not performed any selection operation for the selectable music during the probability variable game period. Therefore, immediately after the game transitions to the probability variable game period, the following processing is executed regarding music playback.

In other words, based on the data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, the sub-CPU 91 identifies the mode image on which the cursor is positioned when the valid period related to the mode selection prompt effect during the ending period of the jackpot game ends, and stores information indicating the effect mode corresponding to that mode image as mode information in the sub-RAM 93. Specifically, for example, if the cursor is positioned on the mode A image when the valid period ends, mode information indicating effect mode A is stored in the sub-RAM 93. Note that this mode information is updated appropriately each time a change operation to change the effect mode is performed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 21 (A), of the nine songs that the player can select during the probability variation game period, song X-1 is set as the main song for presentation mode A, song X-4 is set as the main song for presentation mode B, and song X-7 is set as the main song for presentation mode C.

For this reason, when the first variable probability game in a variable probability game period is started with mode information indicating presentation mode A stored in the sub-RAM 93, the sub-CPU 91 transmits to the image and sound control board 100 a variable presentation start command including information instructing the start of playback of music X-1 (see FIG. 21(A)). Furthermore, when the first variable probability game in a variable probability game period is started with mode information indicating presentation mode B stored in the sub-RAM 93, the sub-CPU 91 transmits to the image and sound control board 100 a variable presentation start command including information instructing the start of playback of music X-4 (see FIG. 21(A)). Furthermore, when the first variable probability game in a variable probability game period is started with mode information indicating presentation mode C stored in the sub-RAM 93, the sub-CPU 91 transmits to the image and sound control board 100 a variable presentation start command including information instructing the start of playback of music X-7 (see FIG. 21(A)).

By executing this process, different music will begin playing for each presentation mode without the player having to select a song. This increases the interest level of the music playback compared to when the same music begins playing regardless of which presentation mode, A, B, or C, is selected for the mode selection prompt. The synergistic effect of the variable presentation (and preview presentation) in each presentation mode and the music playback can produce a powerful presentation effect.

(Regarding the selectable music that players can select during the time-saving game period following the probability variation game period)
21(B), as selectable songs that a player can select during the time-saving game period following the probability variable game period, in addition to the nine songs X-1 to X-9 that can be selected during the probability variable game period, songs Y-1, Y-2, and Y-3 are prepared. Therefore, in addition to the nine pieces of sound data corresponding to songs X-1 to X-9, sound data for playing song Y-1, sound data for playing song Y-2, and sound data for playing song Y-3 are stored in sound ROM 108.

As is clear from a comparison of Figures 21(A) and 21(B), nine songs, X-1 through X-9, are common songs that players can select at will during both the special probability play period and the time-saving play period that follows. On the other hand, songs Y-1 through Y-3 are additional songs that players cannot select during the special probability play period and can only select during the time-saving play period. In this way, with the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, players can select their desired song from nine songs during the special probability play period, whereas they can select their desired song from 12 songs (= 9 songs + 3 songs) during the time-saving play period.

If a player fails to hit a "jackpot" during the variable probability play period and transitions to the time-limited play period, the high base state will be maintained, but as is clear from the notations in Figures 6(A)-(C), the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) that was performed in a high probability state will now be performed in a low probability state. Therefore, while the transition from the variable probability play period to the time-limited play period is not disadvantageous to the player in that the state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second starting slot 22 continues, it can be said that the transition to a state that is disadvantageous to the player in that the probability of winning a "jackpot" decreases. Furthermore, if the player could only select from the same nine songs, X-1 through X-9, during the time-limited play period as during the variable probability play period, they would end up listening to the same songs they listened to during the variable probability play period in which they did not hit a "jackpot." As a result, they may play the time-limited play period with the unpleasant feeling of not having hit a "jackpot."

In contrast, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the time-saving play period begins, it becomes possible to select songs Y-1 to Y-3, which were not selectable during the special probability play period. Therefore, by performing a change operation to change the song being played to one of songs Y-1 to Y-3, the player can change their mood and aim for a "jackpot" during the time-saving play period.

<About the flow of gameplay and music playback during the probability game period and time-saving game period>
Next, referring to Figure 22, the flow of gameplay and music playback during the probability variable game period and the time-saving game period will be explained. A jackpot game (in this embodiment, a jackpot game related to 3R probability variable A, 10R probability variable A, or 3R probability variable B as exemplified in Figures 6(B) and (C)) including a long-open round game in which the second large prize winning hole 28 and the V prize winning hole 287 are long-opened is executed, and if a game ball enters the V during this long-open round game, the probability variable game period described above begins after the jackpot game ends, and the first probability variable game begins (see Figure 22(A)). This probability variable game can be executed up to 100 times unless a "jackpot" is determined during the game.

First, when the game enters the probability variable play period and the first probability variable play begins, the sub-CPU 91 begins playing the main music corresponding to the presentation mode (see FIG. 22(B)). Specifically, if mode information indicating that presentation mode A is set is stored in the sub-RAM 93, the sub-CPU 91 transmits to the image and sound control board 100 a variable presentation start command including information instructing the game to start playing music X-1 (see FIG. 21(A)), the main music of presentation mode A. Furthermore, if mode information indicating that presentation mode B is set is stored in the sub-RAM 93, the sub-CPU 91 transmits to the image and sound control board 100 a variable presentation start command including information instructing the game to start playing music X-4 (see FIG. 21(A)), the main music of presentation mode B. Furthermore, if mode information indicating that presentation mode C is set is stored in the sub-RAM 93, the sub-CPU 91 transmits to the image and sound control board 100 a variable presentation start command including information instructing the game to start playing music X-7 (see FIG. 21(A)), the main music of presentation mode C.

When playback of the main song corresponding to the currently set presentation mode begins in this way, song information indicating the song being played is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70. Here, if song X-1 corresponding to presentation mode A is being played, song information indicating song X-1 is displayed; if song X-4 corresponding to presentation mode B is being played, song information indicating song X-4 is displayed; and if song X-7 corresponding to presentation mode C is being played, song information indicating song X-7 is displayed. The display of song information is as described above with reference to Figure 20.

During the probability variable play period, as long as the player hits the right side, it is easy to accumulate reserves related to the second special pattern determination, and a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern for the second special pattern. Therefore, during the probability variable play period, the variable display and stationary display of the second special pattern will alternate in a relatively short period of time, except when a reach effect or a win notification effect is executed during probability variable play. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, music selection is permitted during the variable display of the special pattern during the probability variable play period (or time-saving play period), and music selection is restricted during the stationary display of the special pattern during the probability variable play period (or time-saving play period). Therefore, during the probability variation game period (or time-saving game period), as the special symbol variable display and stationary display are repeated alternately, a high brightness state (see FIG. 20(B)) in which bright left and right key images are displayed on both the left and right sides of the music information, and a low brightness state (see FIG. 20(A)) in which dark left and right key images are displayed on both the left and right sides of the music information, occur alternately.

Here, when the left or right key on the directional pad is operated while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and in the high brightness state described above, a detection signal indicating that the left key has been operated (or a detection signal indicating that the right key has been operated) is output from the key operation detection sensor to the sub-control board 90, and the sub-CPU 91 detects that a change operation has been performed on the music being played (see Figure 22 (C)).

In this way, when a change operation is performed on the song being played, a song change process is executed to change the song being played (see FIG. 22 (D)). Specifically, when a change operation is performed on the song being played, the sub-CPU 91 sets an operation command notifying that the left key (or right key) has been operated in the sub-RAM 93 by processing step S31 in FIG. 38 (described later), and then transmits the operation command to the image and sound control board 100 by processing step S32 in FIG. 38.

In response to this, the image/acoustic control CPU 101 of the image/acoustic control board 100 first updates the currently playing song information stored in the control RAM 103 based on the received operation command. For example, if currently playing song information indicating that the currently playing song is song X-4 (see FIG. 21(A)) is stored and an operation command notifying that the left key has been operated is received, the currently playing song information is updated to indicate that the currently playing song is song X-3. Also, for example, if currently playing song information indicating that the currently playing song is song X-4 is stored and an operation command notifying that the right key has been operated is received, the currently playing song information is updated to indicate that the currently playing song is song X-5.

After updating the currently playing song information stored in the control RAM 103 in this way, the image and audio control CPU 101 instructs the VDP 104 to execute a song information change display, which changes the song information displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 20) so that it indicates the song identified by the updated currently playing song information. In addition, the image and audio control CPU 101 instructs the audio DSP 107 to read, from the audio data stored in the audio ROM 108, audio data for playing the song identified by the updated currently playing song information into the SDRAM 109, execute data processing, and output the processed audio data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110).

This music change process changes the music being output from the speaker 38 to another music, and the music information on the display screen 70 is updated to show this other music. In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the above-described music change process is executed each time a change operation to change the music being played is detected until the special probability play period ends, that is, until 100 special probability play games have been played since the end of the jackpot game (see Figures 22 (C) to (D)).

On the other hand, if all of the special symbol determinations (basically, second special symbol determinations) made during the 100 chance game plays during the chance game period result in a "miss," the 100th chance game play will end (see Figure 22 (E)) and the first time-saving game play will begin (see Figure 22 (F)). In other words, the chance game period will transition to the time-saving game period.

When the first time-saving game begins, different music playback controls are performed depending on whether the music being played has changed during the variable probability game period or not. That is, if the music being played has not changed during the variable probability game period, i.e., if playback of one of music X-1 corresponding to presentation mode A, music X-4 corresponding to presentation mode B, or music X-7 corresponding to presentation mode C begins at the start of the variable probability game period and the music remains unchanged until the end of the variable probability game period, the player will not be interested in listening to other music, and changing the music being played to another music is unlikely to cause the player any discomfort. Furthermore, since the probability of winning a jackpot decreases when the variable probability game period transitions to the time-saving game period, making it more difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, it is preferable for the player to be able to change their mindset and play.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if the player does not perform a music change operation from the start to the end of the special probability play period, the music being played will be changed to one of the additional music (see Figure 22 (G)). Specifically, if the sub-CPU 91 does not send an operation command to the image and sound control board 100 notifying that the left key or right key has been operated from the start to the end of the special probability play period, the sub-CPU 91 will send a variable effect start command to the image and sound control board 100 at the start of the first time-saving play during the time-saving play period, which includes information instructing the music being played to be changed to an additional music.

In response, when the image/sound control CPU 101 of the image/sound control board 100 receives the variable effect start command containing information instructing a change to an additional song, it executes an effect lottery to select one of the additional songs Y-1 to Y-3 illustrated in FIG. 21(B), and updates the currently playing song information stored in the control RAM 103 to indicate the selected additional song based on the results of this effect lottery. It then instructs the VDP 104 to execute a song information change display that changes the song information to indicate the song identified by the updated currently playing song information (here, one of the additional songs). It also instructs the audio DSP 107 to read, from the audio data stored in the audio ROM 108, audio data for playing the additional song identified by the updated currently playing song information into the SDRAM 109, perform data processing, and output the processed audio data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110).

By executing this processing by the sub-CPU 91 and the image and sound control CPU 101, if no music change operation is performed during the variable probability play period, the music being played will be changed to the additional music when the variable probability play period transitions to the time-limited play period, and playback of the additional music will begin (see Figures 22 (F) and (G)). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the time-limited play period transitions, variable effects and preview effects are executed in a different presentation format than during the variable probability play period. Therefore, by changing the presentation format of the variable effects (and preview effects) and changing the music to the additional music, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to move on from their disappointment at not hitting the "jackpot" during the variable probability play period, and the synergistic effect of changing the presentation format of the variable effects (and preview effects) and changing the music to the additional music can achieve a high presentation effect.

On the other hand, if a music change operation is performed during a probability variation game period, there is a possibility that the music desired by the player is being played. For this reason, it is considered undesirable to change the music being played to an additional music regardless of the player's operation.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if a change operation is performed on the music being played during the special probability play period, the music being played continues to be played even after the transition to the time-limited play period (the music being played does not change to another music). In other words, if the sub-CPU 91 has not sent an operation command to the image and sound control board 100 notifying that the left or right key has been operated even once during the special probability play period, the sub-CPU 91 sends a variable effect start command to the image and sound control board 100 at the start of the first time-limited play during the time-limited play period that does not include information instructing a change to the music being played, thereby causing the music being played at the end of the special probability play period to continue to be played even after the transition to the time-limited play period.

Note that the sub-CPU 91 may detect that a change operation has been performed on the currently playing music based on the input of a detection signal indicating that the left key has been operated or a detection signal indicating that the right key has been operated during the variable display of special symbols during the time-saving game period (see FIG. 22(H)). In such cases, the sub-CPU 91 and the image/sound control CPU 101 execute a music change process to change the currently playing music (see FIG. 22(I)). Note that, as is clear from a comparison of FIGS. 21(A) and (B), the music change process illustrated in FIG. 22(I) is performed in the same manner as the music change process described above based on FIG. 22(D), except for the number and type of selectable music. Therefore, a description of the processing executed by the sub-CPU 91 and the image/sound control CPU 101 for the music change process illustrated in FIG. 22(I) will be omitted.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the above-described music change process is executed each time a change operation to change the music being played is detected until the time-saving play period ends, i.e., until the 100th time-saving play ends after the transition to the time-saving play period (see Figures 22 (H) to (I)).

As illustrated in Figure 22 (J), if the player does not hit a "jackpot" during the time-limited play period following the probability variable play period, the time-limited play period ends and play in normal play mode begins, and playback of the selectable music ends (see Figure 22 (K)). Specifically, when play in normal play mode begins, the sub-CPU 91 sends a variable effect start command to the image and sound control board 100, which includes information instructing the playback of the variable effect sound that is played in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in normal play mode. In other words, the playback of the selectable music ends when the selectable music being played is changed to the variable effect sound.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing music playback control)
So far, we have explained music playback control in the special-rate game state and the time-saving game state (following the special-rate game state) with reference to Figures 20 to 22, but a gaming machine 1 capable of executing such music playback control can be considered as a gaming machine such as the following.

an operating means (for example, a cross key) that can be operated by a player;
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the big win determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31: see FIG. 5);
When the determination is made, a pattern display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the special pattern processing in step S3 of FIG. 28) that variably displays a pattern (for example, a first special pattern or a second special pattern) on a predetermined pattern display means (for example, a first special pattern display device 41 or a second special pattern display device 42) and then stops and displays a pattern that indicates the result of the determination;
a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28) that executes the special game when a symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
a first playback control (see, for example, FIGS. 22(C) and 22(D)) for playing one of a plurality of songs (e.g., songs X-1 to X-9: see FIG. 21(A)) during a first period (e.g., during a probability variable game period) in which a first number of (e.g., 100) of determinations (e.g., second special symbol determinations or first special symbol determinations) are made after the special game ends, and changing the song being played to another of the plurality of songs based on an operation on the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second playback control to play a song not included in the plurality of songs (e.g., songs Y-1 to Y-3: see Figure 21 (B)) during a second period (e.g., during a time-saving game period) in which the judgment is made a second number of times (e.g., 100 times) after the first period.

With this gaming machine, music that is not played during the first period (e.g., music Y-1 to music Y-3: see Figure 21 (B)) is played during the second period. Therefore, if the game transitions to the second period without a determination that a special game will be executed during the first period, the player can enjoy playing the game by listening to music that they were not able to hear during the first period. This effectively prevents problems such as players becoming increasingly annoyed when they are unable to hit a jackpot.

(Other configurations related to music playback control)
The music playback control described with reference to Figures 20 to 22 may also employ the following configuration. That is, in this embodiment, the first number and the second number are the same, but the first number and the second number may be different numbers. Also, in this embodiment, the first number is 100, and the second number is also 100, but these numbers are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other numbers may be used.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming state during the second period (in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state) is different from the gaming state during the first period (in this embodiment, the special probability gaming state), but the gaming state during the second period may be the same as the gaming state during the first period. Further, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming state during the first period is the special probability gaming state, but the gaming state during the first period may be a gaming state different from the special probability gaming state as long as it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming state during the second period is the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming state during the second period may be a gaming state different from the time-saving gaming state as long as it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the player is more likely to win a jackpot during the first period than during the second period, but in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is more likely to win a jackpot during the second period than during the first period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is described in which three presentation modes, presentation mode A to presentation mode C, are prepared for the first period, but the types and number of presentation modes are not limited to this. For example, the presentation mode for the first period may be fixed to one, there may be two presentation modes for the second period, or there may be four or more presentation modes for the first period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as illustrated in Figures 6(B) and (C), there are jackpots that transition to a time-limited play period after the probability variable play period (3R probability variable A, 10R probability variable A, 3R probability variable B), and jackpots that do not transition to a time-limited play period after the probability variable play period (10R probability variable B, 3R probability variable C). Therefore, in order to notify whether or not a transition to a time-limited play period will occur following a probability variable play period, a notification effect may be executed during the 100th time-limited play, which is the final probability variable play in the probability variable play period, to notify whether or not a transition to a time-limited play period will occur.

[Prediction and relevant button effects]
Next, the predictive/relevant button effects executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 25. Here, Figure 23 is a screen diagram illustrating an effect of the predictive/relevant button effects that is executed before the start of the relevant change. Figure 24 is a screen diagram illustrating an effect of the predictive/relevant button effects that is executed during the relevant change, resulting in a failure to reach completion. Figure 25 is a screen diagram illustrating an effect of the predictive/relevant button effects that is executed during the relevant change, resulting in a success to reach completion.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute pre-reading and relevant button effects. The pre-reading and relevant button effects of this embodiment are executed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved while the game is being controlled in normal game mode, based on the results of the advance determination process performed on that reservation, and are effects executed across "pre-target fluctuations" and "pre-reading target fluctuations." Here, "pre-reading target fluctuations" refer to the display of a first special symbol fluctuation (an example of a "specific fluctuation display") that corresponds to the right to determine the first special symbol for which the advance determination process has been performed, and "pre-target fluctuations" refer to the display of a first special symbol fluctuation that occurs before the pre-reading target fluctuation.

Note that while we will explain here the look-ahead/relevant button effect that is executed across two pre-target changes and a look-ahead target change, there are also cases where the look-ahead/relevant button effect is executed across one pre-target change and a look-ahead target change, or where the look-ahead/relevant button effect is executed across three pre-target changes and a look-ahead target change.

Figure 23(A) illustrates the state immediately after the display of the first special symbol and effect symbol corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 begins to change when the game is controlled in normal game mode. As illustrated in Figure 23(A), in the reserved icon display area 71, with the start of the current symbol change, the two reserved icons have been combined into one, and in the effect symbol display area 73 (see Figure 2), a scrolling display of three symbol rows is being performed.

Figure 23(B) shows an example of a situation where a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 when the two left symbols are pseudo-stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol and performance symbol illustrated in Figure 23(A) began, and a second reserved icon is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area 71.

In this way, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, a preliminary determination process is executed for this right, and various effects are produced based on the results of this preliminary determination process (preliminary determination result). Figure 23 (B) shows an example of an icon change effect based on the preliminary determination result, in which the second reserved icon is initially displayed as a blue reserved icon. Here, if it is decided to execute a look-ahead/button effect based on the preliminary determination result, the following effect is produced.

In other words, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead/button effect, a second hold icon (here, a blue hold icon) is displayed and, at almost the same time, a restraint button image is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 23 (B)). This restraint button image shows the first effect button 35 being restrained by a chain, and indicates that the first effect button 35 will not move (will not be pressed) even if operated, and is an effect image that includes the word "HOLD." Furthermore, the restraint button image is an effect image that does not include a validity period gauge that indicates the remaining validity period during which operation of the first effect button 35 is valid.

In this way, when a new winning bid is made at the first starting port 21, the first effect button 35 is shown chained and the word "HOLD" is displayed. Therefore, a player who sees the restrained button image can easily recognize that there is a possibility that a button effect prompting the player to operate the first effect button 35 (the button effect in question: see Figures 24(D) and 25(A)) may be executed, and that the validity period for that button effect has not yet arrived (i.e., the button effect in question has not yet begun).

Note that Figure 23 (B) shows an example in which a blue hold icon is displayed as the second hold icon almost simultaneously with the restraint button image, but a special icon of another color or a white hold icon may also be displayed as the second hold icon.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the restraint button image began to be displayed, the restraint button vibration effect begins (see Figure 23 (C)). This restraint button vibration effect shows the first effect button 35, represented by the restraint button image, vibrating as it tries to escape from the chains. Figure 23 (C) shows an example of the restraint button vibration effect being executed with the left 2 symbol and right 3 symbol pseudo-stopped.

The restraint button vibration effect shown in Figure 23(C) is executed when the first special pattern, which is two patterns before the predicted target change, is being displayed, and Figure 23(B) can be said to be an example of the restraint button vibration effect being executed during the first of two pre-target changes.

In addition, the restraint button vibration effect continues to be executed after the restraint button image is displayed until the first target pre-variation is completed, but during the period until the first target pre-variation is completed, the restraint button vibration effect and the restraint button still effect, which shows the first effect button 35 represented by the restraint button image remaining still, may be repeated alternately.

When the first pre-target variation of the first special symbol has finished, a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, and three display symbols representing the "265" scatter pattern are stopped on the display screen 70 (see Figure 23 (D)). In this way, when the first special symbol is displayed as stopped and the display symbols are stopped, the restraint button vibration display is interrupted, and a restraint button image showing the first display button 35 stationary is displayed. In other words, when the first special symbol is displayed as stopped, the restraint button stationary display is executed.

As described above, when a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and the three performance symbols showing the "265" scatter pattern have stopped, and a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since then, a first special symbol determination is made for the earliest reserved icon (here, the white reserved icon) displayed in the reserved icon display area 71. If the result of this first special symbol determination is "losing" and a variation pattern that results in a no-reach performance being executed as the variation pattern for the first special symbol is selected, a second pre-target variation will begin.

In other words, in response to the first special pattern determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon being executed, the display of the first special pattern change (second pre-target change) begins, and the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three pattern rows begins (see Figures 23 (D) and (E)). Furthermore, as the earliest pending icon shifts to the icon display area 72, the pending icon that is the pre-read target (here, the blue pending icon) shifts and is displayed as the earliest pending icon. Then, as the second pre-target change begins, the suspended restraint button vibration effect resumes (see Figures 23 (D) and (E)).

In this way, after the restraint button vibration effect resumes with the start of the second target variation, as the second target variation approaches its end, for example, the three effect symbols showing the "841" spread will enter a pseudo-stop state (see Figure 23 (F)), and as a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols will stop for real (see Figure 23 (G)). Note that in this case, because the first special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol and the effect symbols are also stopped for real, the restraint button vibration effect will be interrupted, as described above based on Figure 23 (D).

In this way, the restraint button vibration effect is continuously executed during the period from the start to the end of the second target pre-variation, but for example, during this period, the restraint button vibration effect and the restraint button still effect may be alternately repeated.

(When a reach does not occur due to a predicted target change)
As described above, when a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and the three performance symbols showing the "841" scatter pattern have stopped, a first special symbol determination is made corresponding to the earliest reserved icon (here, the blue reserved icon) displayed in the reserved icon display area 71. When the result of this first special symbol determination is "losing" and a variation pattern in which a no-reach performance is executed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a pre-read target variation is started.

In other words, in response to the execution of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the display of the first special pattern change (pre-read target change) begins, and the earliest pending icon (here, the blue pending icon) displayed in the pending icon display area 71 shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three pattern rows begins (see Figures 23 (G) and (H)). Then, as the pre-read target change begins, the suspended binding button vibration effect resumes (see Figures 23 (G) and (H)).

In this way, after the restraint button vibration effect resumes with the start of the predictive target change, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the predictive target change, for example, the left 3 symbol will pseudo-stop (see FIG. 23(I)). Next, when further time has passed since the left 3 symbol pseudo-stopped, an effect is displayed showing the right 3 symbol slowly descending from above (see FIG. 24(A)). Then, when the right 3 symbol descends to a position slightly higher than the position where the left 3 symbol pseudo-stopped, a button release effect is executed (see FIG. 24(B)). This button release effect is an effect that shows the first effect button 35, which has been restrained by a chain, being released. Specifically, it is an effect that shows the chain that has been restraining the first effect button 35 breaking apart, releasing the first effect button 35. When this button release effect is executed, a first effect button image that resembles the first effect button 35 is displayed in the position where the restraint button image was displayed.

In this way, when the button release effect is executed and the first effect button image is displayed, a button movement effect is executed, which shows the first effect button image displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 70 rotating counterclockwise and moving to the center area of the display screen 70 (see Figure 24 (C)).

When the first effect button image moves to the center area of the display screen 70, the operation prompt effect (i.e., the button effect) for the predictive target change begins (see FIG. 24(D)). Specifically, when the first effect button image moves to the center area of the display screen 70, as illustrated in FIG. 24(D), the first effect button image and the validity period for that button effect begin, and accordingly, the word "Press!", which indicates the operation content for the first effect button 35, and a validity period gauge, which indicates the remaining time in the validity period, are displayed.

Here, a first special symbol variation pattern is selected that will result in a no-reach effect being executed when the predictive target variation begins. Therefore, if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period, or if the valid period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, a reach failure effect will be executed as an operation-responsive effect for that button effect (see Figures 24 (E) to (G)).

Specifically, when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for that button effect, or when the valid period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, the effect image for that button effect (the first button image, the "Press!" message, and the valid period gauge) is erased from the display screen 70 (see Figures 24(D) and (E)). Then, a slide occurs in the right 3 symbol (see Figure 24(E)), and the scrolling display of the right column of symbols resumes (see Figure 24(F)). After that, when the scrolling speed of the right column of symbols slows down, an effect display is executed showing the middle 4 symbol and the right 4 symbol descending simultaneously (see Figure 24(G)).

When this type of reach-establishment failure effect is executed, the three symbols on the left, the four symbols in the middle, and the four symbols on the right will pseudo-stop in a horizontal row (see Figure 24 (H)), and as the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols will stop for real (see Figure 24 (I)).

(When a reach is achieved due to a predicted target change)
So far, we have explained the effects of the pre-read target variation when a variation pattern in which a no-reach effect is executed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special pattern related to the pre-read target variation, but if a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special pattern related to the pre-read target variation, the following effects will be executed.

In other words, if a first special symbol variation pattern that will result in a reach effect being executed is selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, the button effect will be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the pre-read target variation began (see Figure 25 (A)). Note that Figure 25 (A) illustrates an example of the button effect being executed as the right 7 symbol descends while the left 7 symbol is pseudo-stopped, but except for the fact that the type of effect symbol that has the potential to become a reach symbol is different, the effects from the start of the pre-read target variation until the start of the button effect are performed in the same manner as described above based on Figures 23 (H)-(I) and 24 (A)-(D).

Figure 25(A) illustrates the execution of a button effect similar to that illustrated in Figure 24(D) when the left 7 and right 7 symbols are displayed. Here, the first special symbol variation pattern, which will result in a reach effect, is selected at the start of the predictive target variation. Therefore, when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period, or when the valid period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, a reach success effect is executed as an operation-responsive effect for the button effect (see Figure 25(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 25(A), the right 7 symbol, which had descended to a position slightly higher than the left 7 symbol, further descends and comes to a pseudo-stop on the valid line at the same height as the left 7 symbol. A linear image bearing the words "Super Hot!!" is displayed across these effect symbols, and the sound "Super Hot!!" is output from the speaker 38 (see Figure 25(B)).

When the successful reach formation effect is executed in this way, a normal reach is executed in the same manner as described above based on Figures 11(A) and (B) (see Figures 25(C) and (D)), and then a development effect is executed in the same manner as illustrated in Figure 11(C) (see Figure 25(E)), and the reach develops into a high-reliability reach such as an SP reach or SPSP reach.

Note that the example described here is one in which a reach is established, followed by a normal reach, which then develops into a high-reliability reach. However, it is also possible, for example, to directly develop a reach into an SPSP reach without going through a normal reach after the reach is established.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing pre-reading and relevant button effects)
So far, we have explained specific examples of pre-reading and relevant button effects with reference to Figures 23 to 25, but a gaming machine 1 capable of executing such pre-reading and relevant button effects can be considered as a gaming machine such as the following.

An input means (for example, a first effect button 35) that can be used by a player;
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31: see FIG. 5);
When the determination is made, a pattern display control means (e.g., the main CPU 81) causes a predetermined pattern display means (e.g., the first special pattern display 41) to variably display a pattern (e.g., a first special pattern) and then causes a pattern indicating the result of the determination to be statically displayed;
a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28) that executes the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game has been determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
a first display control (see, for example, FIG. 24(D) and FIG. 25(A)) that displays an input prompting image (e.g., an effect image including a first effect button image) that prompts the player to input to the input means;
It is possible to execute a second display control (see, for example, FIGS. 23(B) to 23(G)) that displays a suggestive image (for example, a restricted button image) that suggests that the input prompt image may be displayed during both a first period (for example, the period from when a new winning of a predictable target occurs as in FIG. 23(B) until the predictable target change starts) before the start of a specific change display, which is a change display of the pattern in which the input prompt image is displayed, and a second period (for example, the period from when a new winning of a predictable target occurs until the predictable target change starts as in FIG. 23(B) until the predictable target change starts) from the start of the specific change display until the start of the display of the input prompt image (for example, the period from when the display exemplified in FIG. 23(H) is performed until the button release effect exemplified in FIG. 24(B) is executed),
A gaming machine characterized in that it executes a predetermined input-responsive effect (for example, a reach-establishment failure effect: see Figures 24 (E) to (G), a reach-establishment success effect: see Figure 25 (B)) in response to an input to the input means while the input prompting image is being displayed.

With this gaming machine, suggestive images (e.g., a constraint button image) are displayed not only during the second period from the start of a specific change display (e.g., a pre-read target change) in which an input prompt image is displayed until the start of display of an input prompt image (e.g., an effect image including a first effect button image), but also during the first period before the start of the specific change display. This allows the player to recognize at an early stage that an input prompt image may be displayed, allowing them to make input to the input means with ample time to spare when an input prompt image is displayed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, which is capable of executing pre-reading and button effects, can also be regarded as a gaming machine as follows.
The performance control means
The first display control displays the input prompt image in a manner suggesting that the input to the input means is valid (for example, a display control that displays a first effect button image, the word "Press!", and a validity period gauge related to the button effect: see FIGS. 24(D) and 25(A));
A gaming machine characterized by executing the second display control that displays the suggestive image in a manner that does not suggest that the input to the input means is valid (for example, display control that shows the first effect button 35 being bound by a chain and displays a restrained button image including the word "HOLD": see Figures 23 (B) to (I) and Figure 24 (A)).

With this gaming machine, the input prompt image suggests that the input to the input means is valid, while the suggestion image displayed does not suggest that the input to the input means is valid. This effectively prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the input to the input means is valid when they see the suggestion image.

(Other configurations related to pre-reading and button effects)
The following configuration may be adopted for the prediction and button presentation.
That is, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which a button release effect and a button movement effect are executed during the period from when the display of the constrained button image ends until the button effect starts (see FIGS. 24A to 24D). In contrast, in other embodiments, for example, either the button release effect or the button movement effect may be executed, or neither of these effects may be executed.

In addition, this embodiment describes an example in which the display position of the restraint button image (see FIG. 24(A)) and the display position of the first effect button image (see FIG. 24(D)) are different from each other, but the display positions of these button images may also be the same. In order to make the display positions of these button images the same, for example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the restraint button image is displayed in the same display position as the first effect button image, a restraint vibration button effect is executed, and a button release effect is executed without executing a button movement effect before the button effect (see FIG. 24(D)) is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which a restraint button vibration effect is executed during the period from when the display of the restraint button image begins to when it ends, causing the restraint button image to vibrate in place (repeatedly move slightly), but the restraint button image may also be moved or remain completely still during the display period of the restraint button image.

In addition, in this embodiment, we will explain an example in which the restraint button image is always displayed during the period from when the display of the restraint button image begins until the button release effect begins, i.e., during the period from when the display of Figure 23 (B) begins until the display of Figure 24 (B) begins.However, in other embodiments, for example, the restraint button image may be displayed and hidden alternately, so that the restraint button image is temporarily hidden.

In addition, in this embodiment, a button image with partially different display content from the first effect button image is displayed. For example, while the button effect is being executed (see Figures 24(D) and 25(A)), a first effect button image resembling the first effect button 35 is displayed, and before the button effect starts, a restrained button image resembling the first effect button 35 being bound with chains is displayed. In contrast, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a common button image with the same display content as the first effect button image is displayed before the button effect starts. However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that a player who views the common button image may mistakenly believe that the button effect is being executed. Therefore, it is preferable to also adopt a configuration in which, for example, a common button image with the same display content as the first effect button image and representing a semi-transparent first effect button 35 is displayed.

[Preview button effect]
Next, the look-ahead button effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 26. Here, Figure 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the look-ahead continuous button effect. The look-ahead/same button effect described above with reference to Figures 23 to 25 is a button effect executed using at least one (twice in the example shown in Figures 23(B) to (G)) pre-target variation and a look-ahead target variation, but the look-ahead continuous button effect is different from the look-ahead/same button effect in that it is executed using two pre-target variations before the start of the look-ahead target variation without using a look-ahead target variation.

If two pre-target variations, the first pre-target variation (first pre-target variation) and the second pre-target variation (second pre-target variation), are to be executed before the start of a pre-read target variation, a pre-read button effect may be executed based on the results of a preliminary determination regarding the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target variation. The flow of this pre-read button effect is roughly as follows:

(Performance in the first target front fluctuation)
First, the first target pre-change is initiated (see FIG. 26A). Specifically, when at least three pending icons, including a first pending icon corresponding to the first target pre-change, a second pending icon corresponding to the second target pre-change, and a third pending icon corresponding to the predictive target change, are displayed in the pending icon display area 71, a first special pattern determination corresponding to the first pending icon (the pending icon corresponding to the first target pre-change), is executed, and the first special pattern and performance pattern change display (an example of a "first change display") as the first target pre-change is initiated. In addition, the second and third pending icons shift within the pending icon display area 71, and the second pending icon is displayed as the first pending icon.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the first target front fluctuation began in this manner, a first operation prompt effect (an example of a "first input prompt notification") is executed (see Figure 26 (B)). Specifically, as an effect to encourage the player to operate the first effect button 35, during the valid period of the first effect button 35 related to the first operation prompt effect, an effect is executed that displays a first effect button image that resembles the first effect button 35, the word "Press!" indicating the operation content for the first effect button 35, and a valid period gauge that indicates the remaining time of the valid period.

When a player operates the first effect button 35 during the validity period of such a first operation prompt effect, the first operation response effect (an example of a "first input response effect") in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 may be a low reliability suggestion effect (an example of a "first possibility suggestion effect": see Figure 26(C)), a high reliability suggestion effect (an example of a "second possibility suggestion effect": see Figure 26(C)), or neither of these reliability suggestion effects may be executed.

Although not shown in the figure, before the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for the first operation prompt effect, a background image (daytime background) depicting a certain location in the daytime is displayed on the display screen 70. The low reliability indication effect is an effect that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed (i.e., the jackpot reliability as the possibility of a win notification effect being executed in a predictive target variation) is at a first level, and in this embodiment, it is configured as an effect that changes the daytime background to a background image (evening background) depicting a certain location in the evening. On the other hand, the high reliability indication effect is an effect that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is at a second level higher than the first level, and in this embodiment, it is configured as an effect that changes the daytime background to a background image (night background) depicting a certain location in the evening.

In addition, in this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, if the preliminary determination result for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," the first operation-responsive effect is always executed, and the high-reliability suggestion effect is executed with a higher probability than the low-reliability suggestion effect. Furthermore, if the preliminary determination result for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation is a "miss" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol identified by the preliminary determination process is a variation pattern with a variation time of less than a predetermined time, the first operation-responsive effect may be executed, but the probability of its execution is set to an extremely low value. Furthermore, in both cases where the preliminary determination result for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot" or a "miss," if the variation pattern of the first special symbol identified by the preliminary determination process is a variation pattern with a variation time of more than a predetermined time, a low-reliability suggestion effect or a high-reliability suggestion effect is executed. The longer the variation time, the lower the probability of the low-reliability suggestion effect being executed, and conversely, the higher the probability of the high-reliability suggestion effect being executed.

With this configuration being adopted for the first operation-responsive effect, when a high-reliability suggestion effect is executed, the appearance of a certain location becomes darker and the reliability of a jackpot increases compared to when a low-reliability suggestion effect is executed. As a result, the player can easily and intuitively recognize that the darker the appearance of a certain location, the greater the chance of a jackpot.

Note that if it is preset that the first operation response effect will not be executed based on the results of a preliminary determination of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target change, then the low reliability suggestion effect or the high reliability suggestion effect will not be executed regardless of whether the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period for the first operation prompt effect. On the other hand, if it is preset that a low reliability suggestion effect or a high reliability suggestion effect will be executed as the first operation response effect based on the results of a preliminary determination of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target change, and the valid period for the first operation prompt effect ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, then the preset reliability suggestion effect will be executed at the time this valid period ends.

However, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period for the first operation prompt effect when it is pre-set to execute a low reliability suggestion effect or a high reliability suggestion effect, it is not necessarily necessary to execute the reliability suggestion effect, and if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period for the first operation prompt effect, even if it is pre-set to execute a low reliability suggestion effect or a high reliability suggestion effect, the reliability suggestion effect may not be executed.

So far, we have explained the effects that occur during the first target pre-change, but when the first operation prompt effect is executed during the first target pre-change, there are times when a low reliability suggestion effect (see Figure 26(C)) is executed, times when a high reliability suggestion effect (see Figure 26(D)) is executed, and times when neither of these reliability suggestion effects is executed. Also, as described above, if the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target change is a "miss" and the change pattern of the first special pattern identified by the advance determination process is a change pattern with a change time of less than a predetermined time, there are times when the second target pre-change starts without executing the first operation prompt effect (see Figure 26(B)), low reliability suggestion effect (see Figure 26(C)), or high reliability suggestion effect (see Figure 26(D)).

(Production in the second target front change)
When the first target-front variation ends, the first special symbol, which indicates that the result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the first target-front variation was a miss, is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display 41, and accordingly, three effect symbols indicating a scatter pattern are stopped on the display screen 70. Then, when a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the missing symbol was frozen as the first special symbol, the next first special symbol and effect symbol variable display begins as the second target-front variation (an example of a "second variable display") (see FIG. 26(E)).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this second target movement, a second operation prompt effect (an example of a "second input prompt notification") may be executed (see Figure 26 (F)). This second operation prompt effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35, and is similar to the first operation prompt effect in Figure 26 (B).

When a player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period of such a second operation prompt effect, a second operation response effect (an example of a "second input response effect") in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 may be executed as a weak symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (G)), a strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)), or neither of these symbol change effects may be executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, each of the three symbol rows is configured as a symbol row in which nine effect symbols, numbered 1 to 9, are arranged vertically from bottom to top, and in the effect symbol display area 73, each symbol row is displayed in a variable manner so that some of the effect symbols that make up these symbol rows can be seen. Here, the following effect symbols may be displayed as the above-mentioned symbols 1 to 9:

In other words, the effect symbol display area 73 displays symbol 1 consisting of the number "1" and character A in the normal display mode, symbol 2 consisting of the number "2" and character B in the normal display mode, symbol 3 consisting of the number "3" and character C in the normal display mode, symbol 4 consisting of the number "4" and character D in the normal display mode, symbol 5 consisting of the number "5" and character E in the normal display mode, symbol 6 consisting of the number "6" and character F in the normal display mode, symbol 7 consisting of the number "7" and character G in the normal display mode, symbol 8 consisting of the number "8" and character H in the normal display mode, and symbol 9 consisting of the number "9" and character I in the normal display mode.

When the second operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 26 (F) is executed, until the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period of this second operation prompting effect, effect patterns consisting of numbers and characters in the normal display mode are displayed in sequence in the effect pattern display area 73 as each symbol row scrolls. In contrast, when a weak symbol change effect or a strong symbol change effect is executed as a second operation-responsive effect in response to operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period, the display mode of symbols 1 to 9 changes.

Here, when the weak symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (G)) is executed as the second operation-responsive effect, the number "1" that makes up the first symbol remains the same while the display mode of character A changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode, the number "2" that makes up the second symbol remains the same while the display mode of character B changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode, the number "3" that makes up the third symbol remains the same while the display mode of character C changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode, the number "4" that makes up the fourth symbol remains the same while the display mode of character D changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode, and the number "5" that makes up the fifth symbol remains the same while the display mode of character E changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode. Additionally, the number "6" that makes up the 6 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character F changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode; the number "7" that makes up the 7 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character G changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode; the number "8" that makes up the 8 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character H changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode; and the number "9" that makes up the 9 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character I changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode.

On the other hand, when a strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)) is executed as the second operation-responsive effect, the number "1" that makes up symbol 1 remains unchanged and the display mode of character A changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode, the number "2" that makes up symbol 2 remains unchanged and the display mode of character B changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode, the number "3" that makes up symbol 3 remains unchanged and the display mode of character C changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode, the number "4" that makes up symbol 4 remains unchanged and the display mode of character D changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode, and the number "5" that makes up symbol 5 remains unchanged and the display mode of character E changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode. Additionally, the number "6" that makes up the 6 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character F changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode; the number "7" that makes up the 7 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character G changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode; the number "8" that makes up the 8 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character H changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode; and the number "9" that makes up the 9 symbol remains the same, but the display mode of character I changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode.

A character in a weak display mode represents a character in a normal display mode that has become stronger, and a character in a strong display mode represents a character that has become even stronger than a character in a weak display mode.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is configured so that if the preliminary determination result for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target change is a "jackpot," the second operation-responsive effect is always executed, and the strong symbol change effect is executed with a higher probability than the weak symbol change effect. Furthermore, if the preliminary determination result for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target change is a "miss" and the first special symbol change pattern identified by the preliminary determination process is a change pattern with a change time of less than a predetermined time, the second operation-responsive effect may be executed, but the execution probability is set to an extremely low value. Furthermore, in both cases where the preliminary determination result for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target change is a "jackpot" or a "miss," if the first special symbol change pattern identified by the preliminary determination process is a change pattern with a change time of more than a predetermined time, a weak symbol change effect or a strong symbol change effect is executed. The longer the change time, the lower the probability of the weak symbol change effect being executed, and conversely, the higher the probability of the strong symbol change effect being executed.

With this configuration adopted for the second operation-responsive effect, when a strong symbol change effect is executed, the characters that make up each effect pattern become stronger and the reliability of a jackpot increases compared to when a weak symbol change effect is executed. As a result, players can easily and intuitively recognize that the stronger the characters that make up each effect pattern, the greater the chance of a jackpot.

Note that if it is preset that the second operation response effect will not be executed based on the results of a preliminary determination of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target change, then the weak pattern change effect or the strong pattern change effect will not be executed regardless of whether the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period of the second operation prompt effect. On the other hand, if it is preset that a weak pattern change effect or a strong pattern change effect will be executed as the second operation response effect based on the results of a preliminary determination of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target change, and the valid period of the second operation prompt effect ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, then the preset pattern change effect will be executed at the time this valid period ends.

However, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period for the second operation prompt effect when it is preset to execute a weak or strong pattern change effect, it is not necessarily necessary to execute the pattern change effect, and if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period for the second operation prompt effect, even if it is preset to execute a weak or strong pattern change effect, the pattern change effect may not be executed.

So far, we have explained the effects that occur during the second target pre-change, but when the second operation prompt effect is executed during the second target pre-change, there are times when a weak symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (G)) is executed, times when a strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)) is executed, and times when neither of these symbol change effects is executed. Also, as described above, if the result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target change is a "miss" and the change pattern of the first special symbol identified by the advance determination process is a change pattern with a change time of less than a predetermined time, there are times when the pre-read target change will start without executing the second operation prompt effect (see Figure 26 (F)), weak symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (G)), or strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)).

(Performance when predicting target changes)
When the second target variation ends, the first special symbol, which indicates that the result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the second target variation was a miss, is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display 41, and accordingly, three effect symbols indicating a scatter pattern are stopped on the display screen 70. Then, when a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the missing symbol was frozen as the first special symbol, the display of the next first special symbol and effect symbol as the pre-read target variation begins (see FIG. 26(I)).

The flow of presentation for this predictive target variation is generally as follows. That is, there are cases where a reach is not achieved during the execution of the predictive target variation, resulting in a no-reach presentation and a miss notification presentation (see Figures 26 (I) and (L)). There are also cases where a reach is achieved during the execution of the predictive target variation, resulting in a low-reliability reach (e.g., normal reach), and a win/loss notification presentation is presented without developing into a high-reliability reach (see Figures 26 (I), (J), and (L)). There are also cases where a reach is achieved during the execution of the predictive target variation, developing into a high-reliability reach (e.g., SP reach or SPSP reach) via a low-reliability reach (or without passing through a low-reliability reach), and a win/loss notification presentation is presented in the high-reliability reach (see Figures 26 (I), (J), (K), and (L)).

(Regarding various execution probabilities)
Up to this point, we have explained the flow of presentation in the first target pre-change, the flow of presentation in the second target pre-change, and the flow of presentation in the pre-read target change with reference to Figure 26, but in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the flow of presentation to be performed in the first target pre-change and the second target pre-change is set based on the result of the advance judgment process related to the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target change, that is, the presentation pattern for the presentation in the first target pre-change and the second target pre-change is set, and the presentation in these target pre-changes will proceed in a flow according to the set variation pattern.

The sub-ROM 92 stores a jackpot look-ahead button presentation pattern selection table, a reach miss look-ahead button presentation pattern selection table, and a no-reach miss look-ahead button presentation pattern selection table as tables for selecting presentation patterns for the look-ahead button presentation exemplified in FIG. 26. When executing a look-ahead button presentation using the first target advance variation and the second target advance variation, the sub-CPU 91 reads one of these three tables from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93, and references the set selection table to select a presentation pattern for the look-ahead button presentation.

Specifically, when the sub-CPU 91 determines, based on the pre-determination result (pre-determination information) related to the pre-read target variation, that the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation will be a "jackpot," it reads a pre-determination button presentation pattern selection table for jackpots from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93. Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 91 determines, based on the pre-determination result (pre-determination information) related to the pre-read target variation, that the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation will be a "miss" and a reach presentation will be executed for the pre-read target variation, it reads a pre-determination button presentation pattern selection table for reach misses from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93. Furthermore, based on the preliminary judgment result (preliminary judgment information) relating to the pre-read target variation, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment corresponding to the pre-read target variation is a "miss" and that a no-reach effect will be executed for the pre-read target variation, the pre-read button effect pattern selection table for no-reach misses is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93.

Here, the look-ahead button presentation pattern selection table for jackpots is a table referenced when selecting a presentation pattern for the look-ahead button presentation when a determination result indicating a "jackpot" is obtained as a pre-determination result for the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the look-ahead target variation. The look-ahead button presentation pattern selection table for reach misses is a table referenced when selecting a presentation pattern for the look-ahead button presentation when a determination result indicating a "miss" is obtained as a pre-determination result for the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the look-ahead target variation, indicating that a reach presentation will be executed. The look-ahead button presentation pattern selection table for no reach misses is a table referenced when selecting a presentation pattern for the look-ahead button presentation when a determination result indicating a "miss" is obtained as a pre-determination result for the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the look-ahead target variation, indicating that a no-reach presentation will be executed.

In these look-ahead button effect pattern selection tables, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect in the first target pre-variation and the second target pre-variation, and a random number value are associated. When selecting an effect pattern for the look-ahead button effect, the sub-CPU 91 obtains a look-ahead button effect random number for selecting this effect pattern. One of the look-ahead button effect patterns is selected by reading from the look-ahead button effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93 the effect pattern corresponding to the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified by the advance determination information corresponding to the look-ahead target variation obtained from the main control board 80, the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the advance determination information, and the obtained look-ahead button effect random number.

In these look-ahead button effect pattern selection tables, the number of random numbers associated with each effect pattern is set to an appropriate number, so the execution probability of each effect that makes up the look-ahead button effect is as follows:

In other words, with regard to the second operation prompt effect (see Figure 26 (E)), the probability of the second operation prompt effect being executed without going through a reliability suggestion effect (low reliability suggestion effect or high reliability suggestion effect) is set to approximately 3%. In other words, if a low reliability suggestion effect or high reliability suggestion effect is not executed as the first operation response effect, there is only an approximately 3% probability that the second operation prompt effect will be executed thereafter, and in most cases the second target pre-variation will end without the second operation prompt effect being executed.

Furthermore, the probability of the second operation prompt effect being executed when a low reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26(C)) has been passed is set to approximately 20%. In other words, if a low reliability suggestion effect is executed as the first operation response effect, there is a probability of approximately 20% that the second operation prompt effect will be executed thereafter, which is a higher probability than when a reliability suggestion effect is not executed. Further, the probability of the second operation prompt effect being executed when a high reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26(D)) has been passed is set to approximately 70%. In other words, if a high reliability suggestion effect is executed as the first operation response effect, there is a probability of approximately 70% that the second operation prompt effect will be executed thereafter, which is a significantly higher probability than when a reliability suggestion effect is not executed or when a low reliability suggestion effect is executed.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the second operation prompt effect is executed with a higher probability when a high reliability suggestion effect (an example of a "second possibility suggestion effect") is executed than when a low reliability suggestion effect (an example of a "first possibility suggestion effect") is executed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the presentation pattern of the look-ahead button presentation selected by the sub-CPU 91, when a second operation response presentation is executed after a high reliability suggestion presentation (see FIG. 26 (D)), a strong symbol change presentation (see FIG. 26 (H)) may be executed as the second operation response presentation. This strong symbol change presentation is a presentation that suggests that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed than a high reliability suggestion presentation. In other words, the jackpot reliability of the strong symbol change presentation is set to a higher value than the jackpot reliability of the high reliability suggestion presentation. The execution probability of such a strong symbol change presentation has the following characteristics.

In other words, the probability that a strong symbol change effect (an example of a "third possibility suggestion effect") will be executed without going through the reliability suggestion effect is set to approximately 2%, and if neither the low reliability suggestion effect nor the high reliability suggestion effect is executed, there is an extremely high probability that a symbol change effect will not be executed after the second operation prompt effect, or if it is executed, a weak symbol change effect will be executed.

Furthermore, if the low reliability suggestion effect (see Figure 26 (C)) is used, there is a probability of approximately 15% that the strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)) will be executed, and if the high reliability suggestion effect is used, there is a probability of approximately 55% that the strong symbol change effect will be executed. In this way, it is easier to execute the strong symbol change effect by using the high reliability suggestion effect than by using the low reliability suggestion effect.

Furthermore, the probability that a predictive target variation that occurs after the first and second target variations will develop into a high-reliability reach (see Figure 26 (K)) has the following characteristics. That is, if a pattern change effect is not used, the probability of ultimately developing into a high-reliability reach is set to approximately 3%, and if neither a weak pattern change effect nor a strong pattern change effect is executed, there is an extremely high probability that after the predictive target variation begins, a miss notification effect will be executed without a reach effect being executed, or even if a reach is established, a low-reliability reach will be executed without developing into a high-reliability reach, and a win/loss notification effect (win notification effect or miss notification effect) will be executed.

Furthermore, if a weak symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (G)) is used, there is approximately a 10% chance of the game developing into a high-reliability reach, and if a strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)) is used, there is approximately a 95% chance of the game developing into a high-reliability reach. In this way, if a strong symbol change effect is used, it is more likely to ultimately develop into a high-reliability reach due to the predicted target fluctuations, than if a weak symbol change effect is used, and because it develops into a high-reliability reach, there is a higher chance of the winning notification effect being executed, compared to when only a low-reliability reach is executed.

In this way, when the series of look-ahead button effects exemplified in Figure 26 are executed, if a strong symbol change effect (see Figure 26 (H)) is executed, there is a high probability that it will develop into a high-reliability reach, and the strong symbol change effect is most likely to be executed after passing through a high-reliability suggestion effect. For this reason, the player can operate the first effect button 35 for the first operation prompt effect (and the second operation prompt effect) while hoping that a high-reliability suggestion effect will be executed as the first operation response effect and that a strong symbol change effect will be executed as the second operation response effect, thereby achieving a high effect.

(Gaming machine 1 capable of executing look-ahead button effects)
So far, we have explained the flow of various effects that make up the look-ahead button effect and the execution probabilities, etc., with reference to Figure 26, but a gaming machine 1 that can execute such look-ahead button effects can be considered as a gaming machine such as the following.

An input means (for example, a first effect button 35) that can be used by a player;
A determination means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31, which will be described later: see FIG. 5) that determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a pattern display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the special pattern process in step S3 of FIG. 28) causes a predetermined pattern display means (for example, the first special pattern display 41) to variably display a special pattern (for example, the first special pattern) and then causes a special pattern indicating the result of the determination to be statically displayed;
a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28) that executes the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
A performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern, and a performance pattern showing the result of the judgment is displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern,
During the first change display of the effect pattern (for example, during the execution of the first target pre-change: see FIG. 26), a first input prompt notification (for example, a first operation prompt effect: see FIG. 26(B)) is executed to prompt the player to input to the input means, and a first effect control is executed to execute a first input corresponding effect (for example, a low reliability suggestion effect or a high reliability suggestion effect: see FIGS. 26(C) and (D)) according to the input to the input means;
During the second change display of the effect symbol that is performed after the first change display (for example, during the execution of the second target pre-change: see FIG. 26), a second input prompt notification (for example, a second operation prompt effect) see FIG. 26(F)) is executed to prompt the player to input to the input means, and a second effect control is executed to execute a second input-responsive effect (for example, a weak symbol change effect or a strong symbol change effect: see FIGS. 26(G) and (H)) in accordance with the input to the input means,
The first input response effects include a first possibility suggestion effect (for example, a low reliability suggestion effect: see FIG. 26(C)) that suggests that the possibility of the special game being executed is at a first degree, and a second possibility suggestion effect (see FIG. 26(D)) that suggests that the possibility is at a second degree that is higher than the first degree,
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized in that the second input prompt notification (e.g., second operation prompt presentation: see Figure 26 (F)) is executed with a higher probability when the second possibility suggestion presentation is executed than when the first possibility suggestion presentation is executed.

With this gaming machine, the second input prompt notification is more likely to be executed when the second possibility suggestion effect is executed than when the first possibility suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the second possibility suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the second input prompt notification to be executed, thereby achieving a high presentation effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment capable of executing the look-ahead button effect can also be regarded as the following gaming machine.
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second input-responsive effect (e.g., second operation-responsive effect) is executed after the second possibility suggestion effect (e.g., high reliability suggestion effect: see Figure 26 (D)), a third possibility suggestion effect (e.g., strong pattern change effect: see Figure 26 (H)), which suggests that the possibility is higher than that of the second possibility suggestion effect, can be executed as the second input-responsive effect.

With this gaming machine, when a second input-responsive effect is executed after a second possibility suggestion effect, a third possibility suggestion effect (for example, a strong symbol change effect: see FIG. 26(H)) can be executed as the second input-responsive effect, suggesting that a special game is more likely to be executed than the second possibility suggestion effect. This provides a strong motivation for players who expect a special game to be executed to make an input in response to the second input prompt notification, and the synergistic effect of the second possibility suggestion effect (for example, a high-reliability suggestion effect) and the third possibility suggestion effect (for example, a strong symbol change effect) can effectively increase the player's sense of anticipation and achieve a high presentation effect.

(Other configurations related to the look-ahead button effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the look-ahead button presentation.
That is, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which the "first possibility suggestion effect" is a low-reliability suggestion effect that changes a daytime background to an evening background, and the "second possibility suggestion effect" is a high-reliability suggestion effect that changes a daytime background to a night background, but as long as the second possibility suggestion effect suggests that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed than the first possibility suggestion effect, these possibility suggestion effects may be different from the low-reliability suggestion effect and the high-reliability suggestion effect exemplified in this embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which a weak symbol change effect or a strong symbol change effect (an example of a third possibility suggestion effect) is executed as the second input response effect, but as long as there is a higher possibility of a jackpot game being executed when the third possibility suggestion effect is executed than when the second possibility suggestion effect is executed, the third possibility suggestion effect may be an effect different from the strong symbol change effect, and an effect different from the weak symbol change effect may be executed as the second input response effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26(G)) can be executed as the second operation-responsive effect. This weak symbol change effect may have a lower jackpot reliability than the high-reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26(D)), or may have a higher jackpot reliability than the high-reliability suggestion effect. However, if the weak symbol change effect has a lower jackpot reliability than the high-reliability suggestion effect, executing a weak symbol change effect (which has a lower jackpot reliability) after the high-reliability suggestion effect may actually lower the player's expectations for a jackpot. Therefore, if the weak symbol change effect has a lower jackpot reliability than the high-reliability suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing by always executing a strong symbol change effect without executing a weak symbol change effect after executing a high-reliability suggestion effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the two effects that can be executed as the first operation-responsive effect for the first operation prompt effect (see FIG. 26(B)) are the low-reliability suggestion effect and the high-reliability suggestion effect exemplified in FIGS. 26(C) and (D), but a configuration that executes any of three or more first operation-responsive effects may be adopted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the two effects that can be executed as the second operation-responsive effect for the second operation prompt effect (see FIG. 26(F)) are the weak symbol change effect and the strong symbol change effect exemplified in FIGS. 26(G) and (H), but a configuration that executes any of three or more second operation-responsive effects may be adopted.

When adopting such a configuration, if the three or more second operation response effects include a second operation response effect with a lower reliability of a jackpot than the first operation response effect that was executed first, and an operation response effect with a higher reliability of a jackpot, it is preferable to also adopt a configuration in which, in order to prevent a decrease in the player's expectations as described above, the second operation response effect with a lower reliability of a jackpot than the first operation response effect that was executed first is not executed, and the second operation response effect with a higher reliability of a jackpot than the first operation response effect that was executed first is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the "first change display" is the first target pre-change and the "second change display" is the second target pre-change, but the "first change display" and "second change display" are not limited to the first target pre-change and the second target pre-change. For example, the "first change display" may be the second target pre-change and the "second change display" may be a pre-read target change. In other words, the pre-read button effect described based on FIG. 26 may be executed using the second target pre-change and the pre-read target change without using the first target pre-change.

The following explains the RAM configuration of each control board and the processing performed by each control board to achieve the game control and presentation control described above with reference to the drawings up to Figure 26.

[Configuration example of main RAM 83]
27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the memory areas of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each memory area. As illustrated in FIG. 27(A), the main RAM 83 is provided with a determination memory area 830, a special symbol 1/first reserve memory area 831, a special symbol 1/second reserve memory area 832, a special symbol 1/third reserve memory area 833, and a special symbol 1/fourth reserve memory area 834 as memory areas for storing acquired information, etc., acquired when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21. In addition, the main RAM 83 is provided with the determination memory area 830, a special symbol 2/first reserve memory area 835, a special symbol 2/second reserve memory area 836, a special symbol 2/third reserve memory area 837, and a special symbol 2/fourth reserve memory area 838 as memory areas for storing acquired information, etc., acquired when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22.

The determination memory area 830 is a memory area that stores various information used in the special pattern determination when the special pattern determination is actually performed. Special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 through Special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834 are memory areas that store various information related to the first special pattern determination, and Special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 through Special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838 are memory areas that store various information related to the second special pattern determination. Furthermore, if both the first and second special pattern determinations are reserved, the second special pattern determination is consumed with priority over the first special pattern determination. Therefore, when a reserved special pattern determination is performed, the various information stored in Special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 is shifted into the determination memory area 830 if the second special pattern determination is reserved, and the various information stored in Special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted into the determination memory area 830 if only the first special pattern determination is reserved.

As illustrated in Figure 27 (B), reserved memory areas 831-838 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to determine a special symbol, and each area includes an area for storing a jackpot random number obtained by the main CPU 81, an area for storing a symbol random number, an area for storing a reach random number, an area for storing a variable pattern random number, and an area for storing pre-determination information, which is information indicating the pre-determination result.

Here, the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number are as described above. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see Figure 30) described below based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the pre-determination information includes winning start gate information, information indicating whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, information indicating the type of jackpot if a jackpot is found, information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and information indicating the gaming status of the gaming machine 1. Here, the winning start gate information is information indicating whether the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number stored in the same reserved memory area were acquired as a result of the gaming ball entering the first start gate 21 or as a result of the gaming ball entering the second start gate 22. The pre-determination information, including this information, is stored in the same reserved memory area as the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

In the gaming machine 1, each time a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21, the five pieces of information described based on FIG. 27(B) are stored in one of the special chart 1/first holding memory area 831 to the special chart 1/fourth holding memory area 834, starting from the special chart 1/first holding memory area 831. Furthermore, each time a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22, the above five pieces of information are stored in one of the special chart 2/first holding memory area 835 to the special chart 2/fourth holding memory area 838, starting from the special chart 2/first holding memory area 835.

For example, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 when information is stored in the determination memory area 830 and no information is stored in any of the special symbol 1/first holding memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/fourth holding memory area 834, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in response to that winning will be stored in the special symbol 1/first holding memory area 831. Also, for example, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 when five pieces of information are stored in each of the determination memory area 830, the special symbol 1/first holding memory area 831, and the special symbol 1/second holding memory area 832, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in response to that winning will be stored in the special symbol 1/third holding memory area 833.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830 during the execution of the first special symbol judgment, the information stored in the reserved memory areas related to the first special symbol judgment from the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832 onwards is shifted to the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831. For example, when information is stored in each of the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/third reserved memory area 833 and the information stored in the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830, the information stored in the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832 is shifted to the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831, and the information stored in the special symbol 1/third reserved memory area 833 is shifted to the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832.

This type of information shifting process is also performed in the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838, where information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. Note that in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, i.e., when information is stored in both the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 and the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835, the shifting process for the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838 is performed first, before the shifting process for the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834.

However, even if a game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 during the variable display of a special symbol or during a jackpot game and various random numbers are obtained, it is not possible to immediately perform a special symbol determination or display the variable special symbol. For this reason, when various random numbers are obtained under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the various obtained random numbers, etc. in one of the reserved memory areas 831-838 as information reserving the right to determine the special symbol, as described above. On the other hand, when a variable special symbol is not being displayed, a special symbol determination is not being reserved, and the game is not currently in a jackpot game, the main CPU 81 directly stores the various random numbers, etc. obtained in response to the ball entering the start port in the determination memory area 830.

[Interrupt processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to Figure 28. Here, Figure 28 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed by the main control board 80. During normal operation, except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the main control board 80 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Figure 28 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing of the main control board 80, which will be described based on the flowcharts from Figure 28 onwards, is performed in accordance with commands issued by the main CPU 81 based on a program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process to update the various random numbers, including the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, and normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, and normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time step S1 is executed. Note that a loop counter is used as the counter for executing step S1, and after each random number reaches a preset maximum value, it is reset to "0" and updated.

Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 81 executes a sensor detection process (step S2), which includes a process of acquiring various random numbers in response to the input of detection signals from the first start opening sensor 211, the second start opening sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. This sensor detection process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 29.

Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes special pattern determination, causes the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42 to variably display the special pattern, and then executes special pattern processing (step S3), which includes processing for statically displaying the special pattern indicating the result of the special pattern determination. This special pattern processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 31.

Following the processing of step S3, the main CPU 81 executes normal pattern determination, executes normal pattern processing including processing to cause the normal pattern display 43 to variably display the normal pattern, and then statically display the normal pattern indicating the result of the normal pattern determination (step S4).

Following the processing of step S4, if the main CPU 81 determines, as a result of the normal pattern determination, that the second start port 22 should be opened, it executes a second start port opening/closing control process to control the second start port solenoid 222, which operates the opening/closing member 23, to open and close the second start port 22 (step S5).

Following the processing of step S5, if the main CPU 81 determines that a "jackpot" has occurred in the jackpot determination processing executed in the special symbol processing of step S3, it executes a large prize opening opening open/close control processing that controls the first large prize opening solenoid 262 (or the second large prize opening solenoid 282) to open or close the first large prize opening 26 (or the second large prize opening 28) (step S6). This large prize opening open/close control processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 35 to 37.

Following the processing of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes prize ball processing to control the payout of prize balls in response to winning game balls (step S7).

Following the processing of step S7, the main CPU 81 executes a transmission process to transmit to the sub-control board 90 the various commands and information necessary to determine the performance content that were set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps prior to step S7 (step S8).

[Sensor detection process by main control board 80]
29 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 28. As illustrated in FIG. 29, following the random number update process of step S1, the main CPU 81 determines whether the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 25 based on whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate sensor 251 (step S201). Here, if it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 25 (step S201: YES), it determines whether or not the reserved number F of normal symbol determinations stored in the main RAM 83 is less than a preset maximum reserved number Fmax of normal symbol determinations ("4" in this embodiment) (step S202).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), it updates the reserved number F by adding "1" (step S203), and obtains the value of the normal pattern random number, which is updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed, at the time when the passage of the gaming ball through gate 25 is detected, and stores this value in a specified area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S204, determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 25 (step S201: NO), or determines that the number of reserved balls F is not less than "4" (step S202: NO), it determines whether the second starting hole sensor 221 has detected the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 22 based on whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting hole sensor 221 (step S206). Here, if it determines that the second starting hole sensor 221 has detected the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 22 (step S206: YES), it determines whether the number of reserved balls T2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum number of reserved balls T2max for the second special symbol determination ("4" in this embodiment) (step S207).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), it updates the reserved number T2 by adding "1" (step S208), and obtains the values of the timing at which the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 22 was detected for the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed (step S209).

In this way, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are obtained in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 22 when the reserved number T2 is less than the maximum reserved number T2max. If various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830; if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where they cannot be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas: special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S209, it determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S210). A time-saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 83. This time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when the operation of the opening/closing member 23 is controlled to create a low base state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22, and is set to "ON" when the operation of the opening/closing member 23 is controlled to create a high base state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current state is a high base state based on whether the time-saving game flag is set to "ON."

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S210: YES), i.e., when the time-saving game flag is set to "ON," it executes a pre-determination process related to the suspension of the second special symbol determination (step S211). Specifically, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, based on the various random numbers obtained in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the various random numbers obtained in the process of step S209, and to pre-determine which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the second special symbol determination is executed. The pre-determination information resulting from this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved memory area where the jackpot random numbers, etc. used in the pre-determination process are stored.

Note that if a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 when the game is not in a jackpot game, when the special symbol is not being displayed, and the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination is "0," various random numbers obtained in response to the winning are stored directly in the determination memory area 830, and a second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, the second special symbol determination is not reserved, and therefore the pre-determination process for the second special symbol determination is not performed. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 30.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S211 or determines that the high base state is not in effect (step S210: NO), it sets a hold command for the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This hold command is a command notifying that the second special symbol determination has been put on hold, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. Note that if the processing of step S212 is performed without performing the preliminary determination processing of step S211, a hold command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the processing of step S212 is performed after the preliminary determination processing of step S211, a hold command that includes preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S212, if it determines that the second start hole sensor 221 has not detected the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 22 (step S206: NO), or if it determines that the reserve number T2 for the second special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), it determines whether the first start hole sensor 211 has detected the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21 based on whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole sensor 211 (step S214). Here, if it determines that the first start hole sensor 211 has detected the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21 (step S214: YES), it determines whether the reserve number T1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum reserve number T1max for the first special symbol determination ("4" in this embodiment) (step S215).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), it updates the reserved number T1 by adding "1" (step S216), and obtains the values of the timing at which the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 21 was detected for the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed (step S217).

In this way, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are obtained in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21 when the reserved number T1 is less than the maximum reserved number T1max. If various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the first special symbol variable display can be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830; if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where they cannot be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas Special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to Special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S217, it determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S218), similar to the processing of step S210. If it determines that the current state is not a high base state (step S218: NO), i.e., if the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF," it executes a pre-determination process related to the reservation of the first special symbol determination (step S219). Specifically, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, based on the various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process to determine whether a jackpot will occur based on the various random numbers acquired in the processing of step S217, and to pre-determine which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination is executed. The pre-determination information resulting from this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved memory area where the jackpot random numbers, etc. used in the pre-determination process are stored.

Note that if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 when the game is not in a jackpot, when the special symbol is not being displayed, and the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination is "0," various random numbers obtained in response to the winning are stored directly in the determination memory area 830, and a first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and therefore the pre-determination process for the first special symbol determination is not performed. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 30.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S219 or determines that a high base state exists (step S218: YES), it sets a hold command for the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This hold command is a command notifying that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. Note that if the processing of step S220 is performed without performing the preliminary determination processing of step S219, a hold command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the processing of step S220 is performed after the preliminary determination processing of step S219, a hold command that includes preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Preliminary Determination Process by Main Control Board 80]
The preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S211 and S219 in Fig. 29. Note that, here, the preliminary determination process performed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved will be described as an example, but the same preliminary determination process is also performed when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, except that the random numbers and tables used are different.

29 (step S210: YES), or if the main CPU 81 determines that the game is not in a high base state (step S218: NO) in the processing of step S218 of FIG. 29, it executes a jackpot determination process (step S2191). Specifically, if the game is in a low probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "normal game state" or "time-limited game state"), it reads the low-probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83. On the other hand, if the game is in a high probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "high probability game state"), it reads the high-probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83. Then, based on whether the jackpot random number obtained in the processing of step S209 in FIG. 29 (or the processing of step S217 in FIG. 29) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83, it is determined whether a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot is determined to have occurred at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of step S2191 (step S2192). If it determines that a jackpot is determined to have occurred at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (see Figure 9 (A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2193).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot is not reached at the start of the variation (step S2192: NO), it determines whether or not a reach effect will be performed during the variation (step S2194). Specifically, it determines whether or not a reach effect will be performed during the variation based on whether or not the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82.

If the main CPU 81 determines that a reach effect will be performed (step S2194: YES), it reads out the reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9 (B)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

If the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and no reach effect is produced during the variation, the variation pattern of the first special pattern is determined based on the number of reserved first special pattern determinations at the start of the variation. This is as described above with reference to Figure 9 (C). The number of reserved first special pattern determinations may differ before and after the reserved first special pattern determinations are consumed. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special pattern obtained before the first special pattern determination is consumed may differ from the variation pattern of the special pattern selected when the first special pattern determination is actually consumed. In other words, for the right of a first special pattern determination for which no reach effect is produced during the variation, it may not be possible to obtain the accurate variation pattern of the first special pattern prior to the first special pattern determination.

For this reason, if the main CPU 81 determines that a reach effect will not be performed (step S2194: NO), the process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) in FIG. 29 without performing the variable pattern random number determination process in step S2196 (described below) or the process of storing pre-determination information in step S2197. Therefore, if the determination result of the special pattern determination is a "miss" and a no-reach effect will be performed, a hold command that does not include pre-determination information will be set.

However, if a variation pattern that can be selected regardless of the number of reserved symbols at the start of the variation is prepared as a variation pattern for a no-reach miss, it is possible to identify the variation pattern of the special symbol that will be selected at the start of the predicted variation by pre-determining processing. Therefore, for such variation patterns, it is possible to execute the processing of step S2196 (processing to identify the variation pattern that will be selected at the start of the variation) and step S2197, which will be described later.

After setting the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table or the reach miss fluctuation pattern selection table, the main CPU 81 executes a fluctuation pattern random number determination process (step S2196). Specifically, the main CPU 81 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation based on which random number value specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 matches the fluctuation pattern random number obtained when the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191 and the starting gate win.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S2196, it generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area in which this pre-determination information is stored is as described above with reference to Figure 27.

In this way, the main CPU 81 acquires the fluctuation pattern (i.e., fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) based on acquired information such as a jackpot random number acquired when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or second starting hole 22) before performing the jackpot determination process and fluctuation pattern selection process based on this acquired information.

[Special symbol processing by the main control board 80]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of Fig. 28.

As illustrated in FIG. 31, the main CPU 81 determines whether a jackpot game is in progress based on whether the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S301). This jackpot game flag indicates whether a jackpot game is in progress, and is set to "ON" when a jackpot game begins and is set to "OFF" when the jackpot game ends. If it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is not currently being played (step S301: NO), it determines whether a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). If it determines that a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it determines whether the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or greater (step S303). If it determines that the reserved number T2 is "1" or greater (step S303: YES), it updates the reserved number T2 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from it (step S304).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T2 is not "1" or greater (step S303: NO), it determines whether the reserved number T1 for the first special pattern determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or greater (step S305). Here, if it determines that the reserved number T1 is "1" or greater (step S305: YES), it updates the reserved number T1 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from it (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S304 or the processing of step S306, it executes a shift process on the reserved memory area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when executing the processing of step S307 following the processing of step S304, it executes a shift process to shift the information stored in the special drawing 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the judgment memory area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved memory areas from the special drawing 2/second reserved memory area 836 onwards, it also executes a shift process to shift this information to the special drawing 2/first reserved memory area 835. On the other hand, when executing a shift process following the processing of step S306, it executes a shift process to shift the information stored in the special drawing 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the judgment memory area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved memory areas from the special drawing 1/second reserved memory area 832 onwards, it also executes a shift process to shift this information to the special drawing 1/first reserved memory area 831.

The main CPU 81 stores the information necessary for the second special pattern determination (or first special pattern determination), such as the jackpot random number and the pattern random number, in the determination memory area 830 through the shift process of step S307, and then executes the jackpot determination process of step S308 and the variation pattern selection process of step S309 based on this information.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 21 (or second start hole 22) when the jackpot game is not in progress, when the special symbol variable display is not in progress, and when the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination and the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination are both "0", information such as the jackpot random number and symbol random number obtained in response to the winning is stored directly in the determination memory area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and variable pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process of step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and if a jackpot has been determined, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) is determined. Special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is then set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 32.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern for the special symbol (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 33.

Following the processing of step S309, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a fluctuation start command including the special symbol setting information set in the processing of step S308, information indicating whether this special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, setting information for the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of step S309, information regarding the gaming status of the gaming machine 1, etc. (step S310). This fluctuation start command is a command that instructs the start of a presentation accompanying the display of a fluctuating special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. This initiates a fluctuation presentation including the display of a fluctuating presentation pattern on the display screen 70.

Following the processing of step S310, the main CPU 81 begins displaying the variation of the special symbols based on the setting information for the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the processing of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed with information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination memory area 830, the display of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 begins. On the other hand, if the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed with information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination memory area 830, the display of the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 begins.

Next, the main CPU 81 begins measuring the elapsed time since the variable display of the special symbol began in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S312, or when it determines that the variable display of the special symbol is in progress (step S302: YES), it determines whether the elapsed time measured in the processing of step S312 has reached the variable time of the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection processing of step S309 (step S313). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the variable time (step S313: NO), processing proceeds to the normal symbol processing of step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the fluctuation time (step S313: YES), it sets a fluctuation end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the fluctuating display of the special symbol will end (step S314). This fluctuation end command is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, processing such as stopping the display of the effect symbol that was fluctuating on the display screen 70 in a manner that indicates the result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the processing of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol that began in the processing of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set in the processing of step S308 is displayed as a static display on the special symbol display device that has been displaying the variable special symbol. Note that this static display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 causes the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42 to variably display the special pattern, and then causes the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42 to stop and display the special pattern (jackpot pattern or losing pattern) indicating the result of the jackpot determination process.

Following the processing of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time that began to be measured in the processing of step S312 (step S316), and executes processing when the special symbol stops, including processing to start a jackpot game if a jackpot has been reached (step S317). This processing when the special symbol stops will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 34.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Main Control Board 80]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31 . The main CPU 81 first performs a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, the main CPU 81 determines whether a jackpot has occurred based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the determination memory area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A ). The winning value here is the winning value for a jackpot specified in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When a jackpot determination is performed in a high-probability state (which corresponds to the "high-probability game state" in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when a jackpot determination is performed in a low-probability state (which corresponds to the "normal game state" and the "time-saving game state" in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table is used.

In this way, when a start condition is met, such as when acquired information such as a jackpot random number obtained upon a game ball entering the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 is stored in the determination memory area 830, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the processing of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082). Here, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot" (step S3082: NO), that is, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss," setting information for a missing symbol is set in the main RAM 83 (step S3083). As a result, when processing step S315 above, the missing symbol set here will be displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42. In this case, a jackpot game will not be played.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), it executes a jackpot symbol selection process to select a jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42 (step S3084). Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination memory area 830 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which random number value of the jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for the first starting gate winning (see Figure 6(B)) matches that symbol random number. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 illustrated in Figure 6(B) is selected. Additionally, if the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which random number value of the jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for the second starting gate winnings matches that symbol random number. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 shown in Figure 6(C) is selected.

The main CPU 81 then sets the setting information for the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the processing of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42, and then a jackpot game corresponding to that jackpot symbol is played.

[Variation pattern selection process by main control board 80]
Figure 33 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of Figure 31. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of Figure 31, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result of step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step S3091: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot is not reached (step S3091: NO), it determines whether to perform a reach effect to encourage the player to expect a jackpot, based on whether the reach random number stored in the determination memory area 830 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (random number value corresponding to the reach effect) (step S3093). If it determines that a reach effect should be performed (step S3093: YES), it reads out a reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9(B)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). Conversely, if it determines that a reach effect should not be performed (step S3093: NO), it reads out a no-reach miss variation pattern selection table (see Figure 9(C)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3095).

The main CPU 81 executes a fluctuation pattern random number determination process by referencing the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, step S3094, or step S3095 (step S3096). Specifically, when a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table or a reach-miss fluctuation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the determination memory area 830 is read from the set fluctuation pattern selection table, thereby selecting one fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, when a no-reach-miss fluctuation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, a reserved number is identified based on the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination (or the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the identified reserved number is read from the no-reach-miss fluctuation pattern selection table, thereby selecting one fluctuation pattern. By selecting a special symbol fluctuation pattern in this manner, the special symbol fluctuation time is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern, it sets the setting information for the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). This variation pattern setting information, along with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above, is included in a variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90.

[Processing by the main control board 80 when special drawings are stopped]
Fig. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the process when the special symbol stops in step S317 of Fig. 31. After resetting the elapsed time by the process of step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred (step S3171), as exemplified in Fig. 34, in the same manner as the process of step S3082 (see Fig. 32). If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and also sets the time-saving game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3174). Here, the probability variable game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the probability of a jackpot being determined in the special symbol determination is relatively high.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by the settings of the variable probability gaming flag and the time-saving gaming flag. That is, when the gaming state is controlled to the "variable probability gaming state," both the variable probability gaming flag and the time-saving gaming flag are set to "ON." When the gaming state is controlled to the "normal gaming state," both the variable probability gaming flag and the time-saving gaming flag are set to "OFF." When the gaming state is controlled to the "time-saving gaming state," the variable probability gaming flag is set to "OFF" and the time-saving gaming flag is set to "ON."

Following the processing of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 to notify the player that a jackpot game is about to begin (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first jackpot opening 26 (or the second jackpot opening 28 or V jackpot opening 287) during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot has not been reached (step S3171: NO), it determines whether the probability variable play flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, if it determines that the probability variable play flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol determination is being performed in a high probability state, it updates the remaining number of high probability play times K stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This remaining number of high probability play times K indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination will be performed in a high probability state.

Following the processing of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178). Here, if it determines that the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178: YES), it sets the probability variable game flag to "OFF" (step S3179). This causes special symbol determination to be performed in a low probability state.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S3179, determines that the probability variable play flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or determines that the remaining number of high-probability play times K is not "0" (step S3178: NO), it determines whether the time-saving play flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, if it determines that the time-saving play flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), it updates the remaining number of time-saving play times J stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This remaining number of time-saving play times J indicates the remaining number of times that special symbol determination will be performed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the processing of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of times J for time-saving play is "0" (step S3182). Here, if it determines that the remaining number of times J for time-saving play is "0" (step S3182: YES), it sets the time-saving play flag to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22 is no longer provided.

[Big prize opening/closing control process by the main control board 80]
Figures 35 to 37 are detailed flowcharts of the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of Figure 28. Following the second start opening opening/closing control process in step S5 of Figure 28, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the big prize game flag is set to "ON" (step S601), as exemplified in Figure 35. If it is determined that the big prize game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), it determines whether or not the opening period for the jackpot game is in progress (step S602), for example, based on whether or not the elapsed time since the opening command for the jackpot game was set by the processing of step S3175 (see FIG. 34) has reached a predetermined opening time.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening period for a jackpot game is in progress (step S602: YES), it determines whether the opening time has elapsed (step S603). If it determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), it sets the number of rounds Rmax for the jackpot game, the operation pattern, etc., and stores this setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening pattern of the jackpot openings for each jackpot, as illustrated in Figures 6(B) and 6(C), and sets the operation patterns of the opening/closing member 27, the opening/closing member 29, and the slide member 285 so that the first jackpot opening 26, the second jackpot opening 28, and the V jackpot opening 287 are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot.

By executing the processing of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game, such as the interval time from the end of one round of play until the start of the next round of play, and the ending time after the end of the final round of play, are also set.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S604, it updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 by adding "1" to the number (step S605). This number of rounds R is set to "0" before the start of a jackpot game, and is updated by adding "1" each time the processing of step S605 is executed.

Following the processing of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 is "1" (step S606). In this embodiment, as described above with reference to Figures 6(B) and (C), for all jackpots, the second large prize opening 28 is used for the first round of round play, and the first large prize opening 26 is used for round play from the second round onwards. Therefore, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "1" (step S606: YES), it starts second large prize opening opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28 (and V prize opening 287) via the second large prize opening solenoid 282 (and V prize opening solenoid 286) (step S607). Then, it sets a second large prize opening opening/closing round play start command in the main RAM 83, notifying that a round play to open and close the second large prize opening 28 will begin (step S808).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, if the number of rounds R is "2" or greater, it starts first large prize opening opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 via the first large prize opening solenoid 262 (step S609).

Following the processing of step S609, the main CPU 81 sets a first large prize opening/closing round game start command in the main RAM 83 to notify that a round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is to be opened and closed will begin (step S610).

The second large prize opening/closing round game start command set in the processing of step S608 and the first large prize opening/closing round game start command set in the processing of step S610 are transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8 in Figure 28.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in the processing of step S602 that the current period is not the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether the current period is the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it determines whether the current period is the ending period based on whether the elapsed time since the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the current period is the ending period (step S613: YES), processing proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 37) described below.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current period is not the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613: NO), it determines whether the current period is an interval period, for example, based on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the end of the previous round of play (step S614). Here, if it determines that the current period is not the interval period (step S614: NO), processing proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is currently in the interval period (step S614: YES), it determines whether the interval time set in the processing of step S604 above has elapsed since the end of the previous round of play (step S615). If it determines that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7. Conversely, if it determines that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), processing from step S605 onwards is executed.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the game is not currently in an interval period (step S614: NO), i.e., if a round of play is in progress, it determines whether the second large prize opening 28 is currently open, as illustrated in FIG. 36 (step S617). Specifically, after executing the processing of step S607, it determines whether the second large prize opening 28 is currently open based on whether either a first termination condition for the opening and closing control of the second large prize opening 28, that is, a predetermined number of game balls have entered the game opening since the opening of the second large prize opening 28, or a second termination condition for the opening and closing control of the second large prize opening 28, that is, a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second large prize opening 28, is satisfied. If neither the first termination condition nor the second termination condition is satisfied, it can be determined that the second large prize opening 28 is currently open. If it is determined here that the second large prize opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), processing proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the second large prize opening 28 is open (step S616: YES), it determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the V prize opening 287 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the V prize opening sensor 283 (step S618). Here, if it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287 (step S618: NO), processing proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: YES), it sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag that indicates whether the gaming ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (i.e., whether the gaming ball has made a V winning), and although it is normally set to "OFF," it is set to "ON" when the V winning opening sensor 283 detects the passage of the gaming ball.

Following the processing of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the gaming ball has won a V winning (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S620, when it determines that the second large prize opening 28 is not currently open (step S617: NO), or when it determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287 (step S618: NO), it determines whether the second large prize opening opening/closing control started in the processing of step S607 (or the first large prize opening opening/closing control started in the processing of step S609) has ended (step S621). Here, if it determines that the large prize opening opening/closing control has not ended (step S621: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the control of opening and closing the large prize opening has ended (step S621: YES), it determines whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in the processing of step S604 (step S622). Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), processing proceeds to prize ball processing in step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), it starts measuring the ending time, which is the time elapsed since the beginning of the ending period (step S623), and sets an ending command in the main RAM 83 notifying the beginning of the ending period (step S624). This ending command is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the sending process of step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in the processing of step S613 in FIG. 35 that the game is currently in the ending period (step S613: YES), it determines whether the ending time has elapsed (step S626), as illustrated in FIG. 37. Specifically, it determines whether the ending time has elapsed based on whether the ending time measurement started in the processing of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the processing of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), it determines whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). Here, if it determines that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), it sets the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S628), sets the remaining number of high probability games K stored in the main RAM 83 to "100" (step S629), and, although not shown in FIG. 37, sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF."

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S629, or when it determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), it sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" (step S630). Then, for example, based on the information indicating the type of jackpot contained in the opening command set in the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S3175 (see FIG. 34), it determines whether the jackpot that triggered the execution of this jackpot game is a jackpot with a time-saving count of "100" (in this embodiment, 3R probability A, 10R probability A, or 3R probability B: see FIGS. 6(B) and (C)) (step S631).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot that triggered the execution of this jackpot game is a jackpot with a time-saving count of "100" (step S631: YES), it sets the remaining number of time-saving games J to "200" (step S632).If it determines that the jackpot is not a jackpot with a time-saving count of "100" (step S631: NO), it sets the remaining number of time-saving games J to "100" (step S633).In this way, when the processing of step S632 or step S633 is executed, the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF" (step S634).

[Interrupt processing by the sub-control board 90]
When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 sets an interrupt cycle, which is the cycle for performing the interrupt processing described below. The sub-CPU 91 then repeats a random number update process, which updates the effect random numbers and other data used to determine the effect content, at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle. In other words, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub-CPU 91 repeats the random number update process at a predetermined cycle and also repeats the interrupt process at the interrupt cycle.

The interrupt processing executed by the sub-control board 90 will be described below with reference to Figure 38. Here, Figure 38 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed by the sub-control board 90. The sub-CPU 91 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Figure 38 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds), similar to the interrupt processing executed by the main control board 80 (see Figure 28). Note that the processing executed by the sub-control board 90, which will be explained based on the flowcharts from Figure 38 onwards, is performed in accordance with commands issued by the sub-CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 92.

When the sub-CPU 91 receives a command from the main control board 80, it first executes a command reception process (step S10) to perform processing according to the command. This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 39.

Following the processing of step S10, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether any of the first effect button 35, second effect button 36, or cross key (not shown) shown in FIG. 1 has been operated, based on whether or not operation information has been input from the first effect button detection sensor 96, second effect button detection sensor 97, or key operation detection sensor shown in FIG. 5 (step S30). If it determines that the first effect button 35, second effect button 36, or cross key has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command notifying this fact is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S31). This operation command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the processing of step S32 (described below), and processing is performed to realize the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35, second effect button 36, or cross key.

When the sub-CPU 91 has executed the processing of step S31, or when it determines that no operation has been performed (step S30: NO), it executes a command transmission process (step S32). Specifically, it transmits the command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the command reception process of step S10 or the processing of step S31 to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120). Execution of this command transmission process instructs the image and sound control board 100 to execute effects such as displaying images and outputting sound effects, and instructs the lamp control board 120 to execute effects such as lighting up various lamps and using movable props.

Following the processing of step S32, the sub-CPU 91 executes a data transfer process (step S33). Specifically, data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, and this data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the lamp control board 120 controls the effects of the effect means, such as the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, and movable decorative member 14, so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and speaker 38.

[Command Reception Processing by Sub-Control Board 90]
Fig. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of Fig. 38. As illustrated in Fig. 39, the sub-CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S11). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11: YES), it determines whether the command is a pending command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S212 or step S220 in FIG. 29 (step S12). If it determines that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), processing proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it executes pending command reception processing (step S13). This pending command reception processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), it determines whether the command is a fluctuation start command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S310 in FIG. 31 (step S15). Here, if it determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), processing proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes fluctuation start command reception processing (step S16). This fluctuation start command reception processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 43.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a change start command (step S15: NO), it determines whether the command is a change end command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S314 in FIG. 31 (step S17). If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the command is a change end command (step S17: YES), it sets a change effect end command in the sub-RAM 93 that instructs the execution of processing to end the display of the change in the effect pattern and stop and display the effect pattern in a manner that indicates the result of the special pattern determination executed when the pattern change started (step S18).

This variable effect end command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command sending process of step S32, and as a result, a special pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination (or second special pattern determination) is displayed frozen on the first special pattern display device 41 (or second special pattern display device 42), and an effect pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination (or second special pattern determination) is displayed frozen on the display screen 70.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation end command (step S17: NO), it determines whether the command is an opening command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S3175 in FIG. 34 (step S19). If it determines that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), it sets an opening effect start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to start an opening effect that notifies the player of the type of jackpot and encourages the player to hit the right during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S20).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S19: NO), it determines whether the command is a round game start command (step S21). That is, it determines whether the sub-CPU 91 has received a second large prize opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S608 in FIG. 35, or a first large prize opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S610 in FIG. 35.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing in accordance with the received round game start command (step S22).

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a round game start command (step S21: NO), it determines whether the command is a V winning command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S620 in FIG. 36 (step S23). Here, if it determines that the received command is a V winning command (step S23: YES), it executes a V winning command reception process that performs processing in response to the V winning command (step S24). Specifically, it sets in the sub-RAM 93 a V winning notification command that instructs the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute the V winning notification effect illustrated in FIG. 12.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S23: NO), it executes an ending command reception process, which includes setting an ending performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending performance (step S25). The ending performance start command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S25 is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), thereby executing the mode selection prompt performance described above.

[Hold command reception process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of Fig. 39. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), it updates the number of hold special symbol determinations stored in the sub-RAM 93 to a value incremented by "1" (step S131), as exemplified in Fig. 40. Specifically, when a hold command related to a first special symbol determination is received, the number of hold first special symbol determinations is updated to a value incremented by "1", and when a hold command related to a second special symbol determination is received, the number of hold second special symbol determinations is updated to a value incremented by "1".

Following the processing of step S131, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the received hold command includes pre-determination information (step S132). If it determines that the received hold command does not include pre-determination information (step S132: NO), it sets a hold icon display command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S133). This hold icon display command is a command that instructs the display of a hold icon that does not include icon change effect setting information (icon change effect pattern information, described below), and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and lamp control board 120 by the command transmission processing of step S32.

For example, when the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 receives a hold icon display command related to a first special pattern determination that does not include setting information for the icon change effect, it controls the drawing process by the VDP 104 to display a white hold icon in the hold icon display area 71. And, because no settings for the icon change effect have been made for this white hold icon, the icon change effect described above is not performed.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received hold command contains pre-determination information (step S132: YES), it stores the pre-determination information in the sub-RAM 93 (step S134). Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes an icon change effect lottery (step S135). Specifically, it first obtains an icon change effect random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93. This icon change effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time the hold command is received as the icon change effect random number, and determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect based on whether or not the change effect random number matches any of the random number values related to icon change effect random numbers stored in advance in the sub-ROM 92.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores a table that associates the preliminary determination results for the first special symbol determination, the first special symbol variation pattern, and random number values for the icon change effect random number. The sub-CPU 91 refers to this table and determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect based on whether the acquired icon change effect random number matches any of the random number values associated with the first special symbol determination result and the first special symbol variation pattern identified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S134. Note that in this table, more random number values are associated with "jackpot" than with "miss" for the preliminary determination results for the first special symbol determination. Also, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol, the more random number values are associated with the variation pattern. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the higher the reliability of a jackpot, the more likely it is that an icon change effect will be executed, and conversely, the lower the reliability of a jackpot, the more difficult it is to execute an icon change effect.

Based on the result of the lottery in step S135, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect (step S136). If it determines that an icon change effect should be executed (step S136: YES), it conducts a lottery using, for example, random numbers to select one of multiple icon change effect patterns, and sets information indicating the selected icon change effect pattern in the sub-RAM 93 (step S137).

Note that, here, we have explained an example in which the lottery to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect and the lottery to select the effect pattern for the icon change effect are separate lotteries, but it is also possible to determine in a single lottery whether or not to execute an icon change effect, and if so, what effect pattern to use for the icon change effect.

If the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S137, or if it determines that an icon change effect will not be executed (step S136: NO), it executes the above-described look-ahead/button effect pattern setting process based on Figures 23 to 25 to set the effect pattern for the button effect (step S138). This look-ahead/button effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 41.

Following the processing of step S138, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the look-ahead/relevant button effect will be executed based on whether the effect pattern for the look-ahead/relevant button effect has been set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S138 (step S139). The look-ahead/relevant button effect described above with reference to Figures 23 to 25 is a button effect executed using one or more pre-target fluctuations and a look-ahead target fluctuation. Furthermore, the look-ahead button effect described above with reference to Figure 26 is a button effect executed using a first pre-target fluctuation and a second pre-target fluctuation. These button effects have in common the fact that they are button effects and that they are executed using pre-target fluctuations. For this reason, it is undesirable for these button effects to be executed simultaneously. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the following processing is executed to prevent the look-ahead/relevant button effect and the look-ahead button effect from being executed simultaneously.

That is, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the look-ahead/corresponding button effect will not be executed (step S139: NO), that is, if the effect pattern for the look-ahead/corresponding button effect has not been set in the sub-RAM 93, it executes a look-ahead button effect pattern setting process to set the effect pattern for the look-ahead button effect (see FIG. 26) (step S140). This look-ahead button effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-read/corresponding button effect will be executed (step S139: YES), that is, if the pre-read/corresponding button effect pattern has been set in the sub-RAM 93, it executes the processing of step S142, which will be described later, without executing the processing of step S140.

Here, we will explain an example in which, when a look-ahead/relevant button effect is executed, the process of step S140, which sets the effect pattern for the look-ahead button effect, is not executed, thereby avoiding the look-ahead/relevant button effect and the look-ahead button effect from being executed simultaneously. However, for example, if the process of step S140 is executed prior to the process of step S138 and the effect pattern for the look-ahead button effect is set, the process of step S138 may be not executed, thereby avoiding the look-ahead button effect and the look-ahead/relevant button effect from being executed simultaneously.

In addition, for example, both the process of step S138 for setting the effect pattern for the pre-reading/relevant button effect and the process of step S140 for setting the effect pattern for the pre-reading button effect may be executed, and if both of these button effect patterns are set, one of the effect patterns determined by lottery may be discarded, thereby avoiding the pre-reading/relevant button effect and the pre-reading button effect being executed simultaneously.

Returning to the explanation of the processing in this embodiment, when the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S140 or determines that a look-ahead/relevant button effect will be executed (step S139: YES), it sets a pending icon display command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S142). Specifically, if information indicating the effect pattern of the icon change effect (icon change effect pattern information) has been set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S137, it sets a pending icon display command including that icon change effect pattern information in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the icon change effect. Furthermore, if information indicating the effect pattern of the look-ahead/relevant button effect (look-ahead/relevant button effect pattern information) has been set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S138, it sets a pending icon display command including that look-ahead/relevant button effect pattern information in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the look-ahead/relevant button effect. On the other hand, if information indicating the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect (look-ahead button effect pattern information) has been set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S140, a hold icon display command including that look-ahead button effect pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the look-ahead button effect.

The pending icon display command set in the sub-RAM 93 in this manner by the processing of step S142 is transmitted to the image/acoustic control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission processing of step S32. In response to this, if the received pending icon display command includes icon change presentation pattern information, the image/acoustic control CPU 101 of the image/acoustic control board 100 stores the icon change presentation pattern information in the control RAM 103 as setting information for the icon change presentation, and instructs the VDP 104 and audio DSP 107 to execute the processing required to realize the icon change presentation based on this setting information. Also, if the received pending icon display command includes look-ahead/relevant button presentation pattern information, the image/acoustic control CPU 101 stores the look-ahead/relevant button presentation pattern information in the control RAM 103 as setting information for the look-ahead/relevant button presentation, and instructs the VDP 104 and audio DSP 107 to execute the processing required to realize the look-ahead/relevant button presentation based on this setting information. Furthermore, if the received hold icon display command includes look-ahead button effect pattern information, the look-ahead button effect pattern information is stored in the control RAM 103 as setting information for the look-ahead button effect, and the VDP 104 and audio DSP 107 are instructed to execute the processing required to realize the look-ahead button effect based on this setting information.

[Pre-reading by the sub-control board 90 and setting of the relevant button effect pattern]
Fig. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the look-ahead and button effect pattern setting process in step S138 of Fig. 40. When the sub-CPU 91 has executed the process of step S137 or when it has determined that an icon change effect will not be executed (step S136: NO), it executes a series of look-ahead and button effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 41.

When the pre-reading/relevant button effect is executed, a reach-achi failure effect and a miss notification effect may be executed depending on the operation of the first effect button 35 for that button effect (see Figures 24 (D) to (I)). Also, when the pre-reading/relevant button effect is executed, a reach-achi success effect, a normal reach, or a high-reliability reach may be executed depending on the operation of the first effect button 35 for that button effect (see Figure 25).

From these facts, it can be said that in order to execute the pre-reading/button effect, it is necessary to select, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol related to the pre-reading target variation, either a variation pattern in which a no-reach effect is executed (for example, variation pattern L: see Figure 9 (C)), or a variation pattern in which a normal reach and a high-reliability reach are executed (for example, variation patterns D and I: see Figures 9 (A) and (B)).

For this reason, the sub-CPU 91 first determines, based on the advance determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S134 in FIG. 40, whether the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the pre-read target variation is a specific variation pattern (in the above example, any of variation patterns D, I, or L) required to execute the pre-read and the button effect (step S1381). Here, if it is determined that it is not a specific variation pattern (step S1381: NO), the processing of step S1382 and subsequent steps is not executed, and processing proceeds to step S139 (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the pre-read target variation is a specific variation pattern required to execute the pre-read/button effect (step S1381: YES), it performs the following processing to determine whether to execute the pre-read/button effect.

That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the value of the pre-read/relevant button effect random number, which is updated appropriately each time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90, at the time the hold command is received from the main control board 80, and stores this value in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1382). Then, based on whether the pre-read/relevant button effect random number acquired in this way matches any of the random number values (winning values) to be compared with the pre-read/relevant button effect random number stored in the sub-ROM 92, it determines whether to execute the pre-read/relevant button effect (step S1383). If it is determined here that the pre-read/relevant button effect will not be executed (step S1383: NO), processing proceeds to step S139.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a look-ahead/button effect will be executed (step S1383: YES), it determines whether or not a reach effect will be executed in the look-ahead target change (step S1384). The sub-ROM 92 stores a change effect pattern selection table that associates the change pattern of the first special symbol with the change effect pattern of the change effect, including the effect that changes the effect pattern. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 can determine whether or not a reach effect will be executed in the look-ahead target change by reading from the change effect pattern selection table the change effect pattern that corresponds to the change pattern of the first special symbol identified based on the advance determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that a reach effect will be executed in the pre-read target variation (step S1384: YES), i.e., if it has determined that variation pattern D or variation pattern I will be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation, it executes a successful variation pattern selection process to select a successful variation pattern related to the pre-read and relevant button variation so that the pre-read and relevant button variation of the successful variation pattern exemplified in FIGS. 23(B)-(I), 24(A)-(C), and 25(A)-(B) will be executed (step S1385). On the other hand, if it determines that a reach effect will not be executed in the pre-read target variation (step S1384: NO), i.e., if it has determined that variation pattern L will be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation, it executes a failure variation pattern selection process to select a failure variation pattern related to the pre-read and relevant button variation so that the pre-read and relevant button variation of the failure variation pattern exemplified in FIGS. 23(B)-(I) and 24(A)-(G) will be executed (step S1386).

Then, the sub-CPU 91 sets information indicating the successful presentation pattern selected in the processing of step S1385 or information indicating the unsuccessful presentation pattern selected in the processing of step S1386 in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the pre-reading and relevant button presentation (step S1387). A hold icon display command including the pre-reading and relevant button presentation setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 in this way is sent to the image and sound control board 100, thereby realizing the pre-reading and relevant button presentation as described above.

[Pre-reading button effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the look-ahead button effect pattern setting process in step S140 of Fig. 40. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that look-ahead/the button effect is not to be executed (step S139: NO), it executes a series of look-ahead button effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 42.

As described above with reference to Figure 26, the look-ahead button effect executed on the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is executed using two pre-target variations, the first pre-target variation and the second pre-target variation, and therefore these two pre-target variations must be executed before the look-ahead target variation begins. In other words, the execution condition for the look-ahead button effect is that two pre-target variations must be executed before the look-ahead target variation begins.

The sub-CPU 91 therefore first references the number of pending first special symbol determinations stored in the sub-RAM 93, and determines whether or not the pre-read button effect can be executed based on whether or not two pre-target variations are executed before the start of the pre-read target variation (step S1401). Here, if it is determined that the pre-read button effect cannot be executed (step S1401: NO), that is, if two pre-target variations are not executed before the start of the pre-read target variation, processing proceeds to step S142 (see Figure 40) described above.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the look-ahead button effect can be executed (step S1401: YES), it acquires the value of the look-ahead button effect random number, which is updated appropriately each time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, at the time the hold command was received from the main control board 80 and stores this value in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1402). Then, it determines whether to execute the look-ahead button effect based on whether the look-ahead button effect random number acquired in this way matches any of the random number values (winning values) that are compared with the look-ahead button effect random number stored in the sub-ROM 92 (step S1403). Here, if it is determined that the look-ahead button effect should not be executed (step S1403: NO), processing proceeds to step S142.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a look-ahead button effect should be executed (step S1403: YES), it determines whether the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the look-ahead target change will be a "jackpot" based on the advance determination information related to the look-ahead target change (step S1404). If it determines that a "jackpot" will be achieved (step S1404: YES), it reads out the look-ahead button effect pattern selection table for jackpots from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1405), as described above with reference to FIG. 26.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-read target change does not result in a "jackpot" (step S1404: NO), i.e., if it results in a "miss," it determines, based on the pre-determination information related to the pre-read target change, whether or not a reach effect will be executed and a miss notification effect will be executed in the pre-read target change (step S1406). If it determines that a reach effect will be executed and a miss notification effect will be executed in the pre-read target change (step S1406: YES), it reads a reach/miss pre-read button effect pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1407). If it determines that a miss notification effect will be executed without a reach effect in the pre-read target change (step S1406: NO), it reads a no-reach miss pre-read button effect pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1408). The process of reading these look-ahead button effect pattern selection tables from the sub-ROM 92 and setting them in the sub-RAM 93 is as described above with reference to Figure 26.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1405, step S1407, or step S1408, it executes a look-ahead button effect pattern selection process (step S1409). Specifically, it selects one look-ahead button effect pattern by reading, from the look-ahead button effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, the effect pattern corresponding to the first special symbol determination result specified by the advance determination information corresponding to the look-ahead target variation obtained from the main control board 80, the first special symbol variation pattern specified by the advance determination information, and the obtained look-ahead button effect random number. Note that, here, an example is described in which the look-ahead button effect pattern is selected using the same look-ahead button effect random number used to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead button effect; however, a look-ahead button effect pattern may also be selected using a random number different from the look-ahead button effect random number.

When the sub-CPU 91 selects a presentation pattern for the look-ahead button presentation by processing step S1409, it sets look-ahead button presentation pattern information indicating the presentation pattern for that look-ahead button presentation in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the look-ahead button presentation (step S1410). A hold icon display command including the setting information for the look-ahead button presentation set in the sub-RAM 93 is sent to the image and sound control board 100 in this manner, thereby realizing the look-ahead button presentation as described above.

[Fluctuation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of Fig. 39. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes exemplified in Fig. 43.

That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the value of the effect random number, which is updated appropriately by the random number update process on the sub-control board 90, at the time when it receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80, and stores this value in the sub-RAM 93 (step S161). Then, it analyzes the received fluctuation start command (step S162).

As described above, this fluctuation start command includes the symbol setting information indicating the result of the jackpot determination process, winning start gate information indicating whether the symbol setting information relates to the first or second special symbol determination, setting information for the special symbol fluctuation pattern, and information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be identified. That is, it is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot. Furthermore, by determining whether the fluctuation pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether a reach effect or a no-reach effect needs to be performed. Similarly, based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, the special symbol fluctuation time can be determined. Furthermore, based on the information indicating the gaming state, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be determined.

When the sub-CPU 91 analyzes the variation start command, it executes a variation effect pattern setting process based on the analysis results to set the variation effect pattern for the variation effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol (step S163). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive effect, the type of effect symbol that constitutes the reach effect symbol, the type and content of the reach effect, the content of the pseudo-consecutive effect, the type of effect symbol that will be stopped and displayed, etc. will be determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 44.

Following the processing of step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a preview effect pattern setting process (step S164) to set various preview effects that are executed when the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variable effect pattern set in the processing of step S163. This preview effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 45.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 sets a variable performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the start of a variable performance using the variable performance pattern set in the processing of step S163, and to execute a preview performance using the preview performance pattern set in the processing of step S164 (step S170).

This variable performance start command includes information indicating the variable performance pattern set by the processing of step S163 and information indicating the preview performance pattern set by the processing of step S164, and is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command sending processing of step S32. As a result, the variable performance and preview performance, whose performance patterns have been determined by the sub-control board 90, are realized by the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the processing of step S170, the sub-CPU 91 updates the pending number stored in the sub-RAM 93 to a value minus "1" (step S171). Specifically, if the variation start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the sub-CPU 91 updates the pending number for the first special symbol determination to a value minus "1". On the other hand, if the variation start command received notifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 91 updates the pending number for the second special symbol determination to a value minus "1".

[Variable performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of Fig. 43. Following the process of step S162, the sub-CPU 91 executes a fixed effect pattern setting process (step S1631) to set the effect pattern to be finally fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) on the display screen 70 in association with the stopped display of the first special pattern (or the second special pattern).

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not a reach effect needs to be produced in conjunction with the current display of the special symbol change, based on the setting information for the special symbol change pattern included in the received change start command (step S1632). If it determines that a reach effect does not need to be produced (step S1632: NO), it sets a change effect pattern for a no-reach effect (step S1633). For example, it reads one of the change effect patterns corresponding to the effect random number obtained in the processing of step S161 from a no-reach change effect pattern selection table in which multiple types of no-reach change effect patterns are associated with each special symbol change pattern, and sets information indicating that change effect pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a reach effect is necessary (step S1632: YES), it sets a reach effect variable presentation pattern (step S1634). For example, it reads one of the variable presentation patterns corresponding to the presentation random number obtained in the processing of step S161 from a reach effect variable presentation pattern selection table in which multiple reach effect variable presentation patterns are associated with each combination of the special symbol determination result and the special symbol variable presentation pattern, and sets information indicating that variable presentation pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

By performing the processing of step S1633 or step S1634, it is determined what variation pattern the display symbols will use, which reach effect will be used if a reach effect is to be performed, and how the reach effect will be developed if the reach effect is to be developed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable performance start command instructing the start of a variable performance using the variable performance pattern set in the processing of step S1633 (or the processing of step S1634) is sent from the sub-control board 90 to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), thereby realizing a variable performance including the display of a variable performance pattern.

[Preview effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Figure 45 is a detailed flowchart of the notice presentation pattern setting process in step S164 of Figure 43. Following the variable presentation pattern setting process in step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of notice presentation pattern setting processes illustrated in Figure 45. That is, first, a reach-to-be-achieved big chance notice presentation pattern setting process is executed to set a presentation pattern for a reach-to-be-achieved big chance notice (step S165). This reach-to-be-achieved big chance notice is a notice presentation composed of the reach-to-be-achieved teasing presentation described above with reference to Figures 13 to 15 and a reach-to-be-achieved successful presentation (or reach-to-be-achieved failed presentation). This reach-to-be-achieved big chance notice presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 46.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice presentation pattern setting processing to set a presentation pattern for the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice, which is composed of the SP Reach mid-notification and SPSP Reach mid-notification described above, based on Figures 16 to 19 (step S166). Then, it selects a presentation pattern for a notice presentation other than the Reach establishment big chance notice and the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice (step S167). Note that the processing of this step S167 can be performed in the same manner as before, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

[Reach-formed big chance notice performance pattern setting process by the sub-control board 90]
Fig. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the reach-achi big chance advance notice presentation pattern setting process in step S165 of Fig. 45. Following the process of step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of reach-achi big chance advance notice presentation pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 46.

The Reach Completion Great Chance Notice (see Figures 13 (C) to (F)), which is composed of a Reach Completion prompting effect and a Reach Completion Success effect, is an effect that can be executed when a first special symbol change pattern (e.g., change pattern C or change pattern H: see Figures 9 (A) and (B)) that will directly develop into an SPSP Reach immediately after a Reach is completed is selected at the start of the first special symbol change display. On the other hand, the Reach Completion Great Chance Notice (see Figures 14 (A) to (G)), which is composed of a Reach Completion prompting effect and a Reach Completion Failure effect, is an effect that can be executed when a first special symbol change pattern (e.g., change pattern L: see Figure 9 (C)) that will result in a No Reach effect is selected at the start of the first special symbol change display.

As such, there are only a limited number of first special symbol movement patterns that can execute the reach-to-win big chance announcement. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 executes the following process to determine whether the reach-to-win big chance announcement can be executed in conjunction with the current display of the first special symbol movement. Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the movement pattern of the first special symbol identified based on the movement start command received from the main control board 80 is a specific movement pattern that can execute the reach-to-win big chance announcement (step S1651). Specifically, it determines whether the identified movement pattern of the first special symbol is movement pattern C, movement pattern H, or movement pattern L. If it is determined that the movement pattern is not a specific movement pattern (step S1651: NO), processing proceeds to step S166, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol related to the current fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a specific fluctuation pattern (step S1651: YES), i.e., fluctuation pattern C, fluctuation pattern H, or fluctuation pattern L, it acquires the value of the reach-to-achievement big chance advance notice performance random number, which is updated appropriately each time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, at the time of receiving the current fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 and stores this value in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1652). Then, it determines whether to execute a reach-to-achievement big chance advance notice based on whether the reach-to-achievement big chance advance notice performance random number thus acquired matches any of the random number values (winning values) that are compared with the reach-to-achievement big chance advance notice performance random number stored in the sub-ROM 92 (step S1653). Here, if it is determined that a reach-to-achievement big chance advance notice should not be executed (step S1653: NO), processing proceeds to step S166.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a reach-achievement big chance announcement will be executed (step S1653: YES), it executes a reach-achievement prompting effect pattern selection process (step S1654) to select an effect pattern for the reach-achievement prompting effect exemplified in Figures 13(C)-(E) and 14(A)-(C). Next, based on the analysis results of the variation start command received from the main control board 80, it determines whether a no-reach effect will be executed during the current display of the first special symbol variation (step S1655). Here, if it determines that a no-reach effect will not be executed (step S1655: NO), i.e., if a reach effect will be executed, it executes a reach-achievement success effect pattern selection process (step S1657) to select an effect pattern for executing the reach-achievement success effect exemplified in Figure 13(F). Conversely, if it is determined that a no-reach effect will be executed (step S1655: YES), a reach-failure effect pattern selection process is executed (step S1656), which selects an effect pattern for executing a reach-failure effect, as exemplified in Figures 14 (D) to (G).

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1656 or the processing of step S1657, it sets the setting information for the reach-establishment big chance notice in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1658). Specifically, when the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1654 and then executes the processing of step S1656, it sets information indicating the presentation pattern for the reach-establishment teasing presentation selected in the processing of step S1654 and information indicating the presentation pattern for the reach-establishment failure presentation selected in the processing of step S1656 as the setting information for the reach-establishment big chance notice in the sub-RAM 93. Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1654 and then executes the processing of step S1657, it sets information indicating the presentation pattern for the reach-establishment teasing presentation selected in the processing of step S1654 and information indicating the presentation pattern for the reach-establishment success presentation selected in the processing of step S1657 as the setting information for the reach-establishment big chance notice.

The setting information for the reach-to-win big chance announcement set in the sub-RAM 93 in this way is included in the variable performance start command and sent to the image and sound control board 100 by the command sending process of step S32, thereby executing the reach-to-win big chance announcement in the performance pattern set on the sub-control board 90.

[SP Reach/SPSP Reach Notice Performance Pattern Setting Process by Sub-Control Board 90]
Fig. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the SP reach/SPSP reach notice performance pattern setting process in step S166 of Fig. 45. Following the process of step S165, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of SP reach/SPSP reach notice performance pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 47.

As described above with reference to Figures 16 to 19, during the display of the first special symbol variation, there are cases where an SP reach/SPSP reach notice is executed, in which the SP reach develops into an SPSP reach (see Figure 18), and cases where an SP reach/SPSP reach notice is executed, in which the SP reach does not develop into an SPSP reach (see Figure 16). In other words, the SP reach/SPSP reach notice is executable when a variation pattern for the first special symbol is selected in which a win/loss notification effect is executed with the SP reach without developing into an SPSP reach (e.g., variation pattern B or variation pattern G: see Figures 9(A) and (B)), or when a variation pattern is selected in which the SP reach develops into an SPSP reach and a win/loss notification effect is executed with the SPSP reach (e.g., variation pattern E or variation pattern J: see Figures 9(A) and (B)). However, it is not executed when any other variation pattern is selected.

As such, there are only a limited number of first special symbol movement patterns that can execute an SP Reach/SPSP Reach announcement. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 executes the following process to determine whether an SP Reach/SPSP Reach announcement can be executed in conjunction with the current display of the first special symbol movement. Specifically, based on the movement pattern of the first special symbol identified based on the movement start command received from the main control board 80, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the movement pattern is a specific movement pattern that can execute an SP Reach/SPSP Reach announcement (step S1661). Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the identified movement pattern of the first special symbol is movement pattern B, movement pattern G, movement pattern E, or movement pattern J. If it is determined that the movement pattern is not a specific movement pattern (step S1661: NO), processing proceeds to step S167.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol related to the current first special symbol fluctuation display is a specific fluctuation pattern (step S1661: YES), i.e., fluctuation pattern B, fluctuation pattern G, fluctuation pattern E, or fluctuation pattern J, it acquires the value of the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice performance random number, which is updated appropriately each time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, at the time the current fluctuation start command was received from the main control board 80 and stores this value in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1662). Then, it determines whether to execute the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice based on whether the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice performance random number acquired in this way matches any of the random number values (winning values) compared with the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice performance random number stored in the sub-ROM 92 (step S1663). If it is determined here that an SP Reach or SPSP Reach announcement will not be executed (step S1663: NO), processing proceeds to step S167.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that an SP Reach/SPSP Reach notification should be executed (step S1663: YES), it determines whether the game will progress to an SPSP Reach (step S1664). A variable effect pattern selection table that associates the first special symbol variation pattern with the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern) is stored in the sub-ROM 92. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 can read from the variable effect pattern selection table a variable effect pattern corresponding to the first special symbol variation pattern identified based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, and determine whether the game will progress to an SPSP Reach based on the read variable effect pattern. In this embodiment, as illustrated in Figures 9(A) and 9(B), variation patterns E and J, which develop from an SP Reach to an SPSP Reach, are associated with variation patterns E and J, respectively, and variation patterns B and G, which execute a win/loss notification effect in an SP Reach without progressing to an SPSP Reach, are associated with variation patterns B and G, respectively. For this reason, if variation pattern E or variation pattern J is selected as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, it is determined that the pattern will develop into an SPSP reach, and if variation pattern B or variation pattern G is selected, it is determined that the pattern will not develop into an SPSP reach.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will not progress to an SPSP Reach (step S1664: NO), it executes a process for selecting a failure notice effect pattern during the SP Reach (step S1665). Specifically, as the effect pattern for the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice, it selects an effect pattern in which an explanatory effect (see FIG. 16(B)) is performed, followed by a rapid-hit promotion effect (see FIG. 16(C)), and the display mode of the first suggestive image does not change from its initial display mode even if the player repeatedly hits the first effect button 35 during the valid period of this rapid-hit promotion effect (see FIGS. 16(D) and (E)).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will progress to an SPSP Reach (step S1664: YES), it executes a process for selecting a success notification effect pattern during the SP Reach (step S1666) and then executes a process for selecting a success notification effect pattern during the SPSP Reach (step S1667). Specifically, after an explanatory effect (see FIG. 16(B)), the sub-CPU 91 starts a rapid-fire promotion effect (see FIG. 18(A)), and selects an SP Reach success notification effect pattern that represents the change in the display mode of the first suggestive image from its initial display mode (see FIGS. 18(B)-(D)) in response to the player's rapid pressing of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the rapid-fire promotion effect. Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 18(H)-(I) and 19(A)-(C), the sub-CPU 91 changes the display mode of the second suggestive image using the first suggestive image whose display mode has changed, and then selects an SPSP Reach notification effect pattern that represents the execution of a final attack effect.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1665 or the processing of step S1667, it sets the setting information for the SP reach/SPSP reach notice in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1668). Specifically, when the processing of step S1665 is executed, information indicating the presentation pattern for the SP reach failure notice selected in the processing of step S1665 is set in the sub-RAM 93 as the setting information for the SP reach/SPSP reach notice. Furthermore, when the processing of step S1666 and the processing of step S1667 are executed, information indicating the presentation pattern for the SP reach success notice selected in the processing of step S1666 and information indicating the presentation pattern for the SPSP reach notice selected in the processing of step S1667 are set in the sub-RAM 93 as the setting information for the SP reach/SPSP reach notice.

The setting information for the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice set in the sub-RAM 93 in this way is included in the variable performance start command and sent to the image and sound control board 100 by the command sending process of step S32, thereby executing the SP Reach/SPSP Reach notice in the performance pattern set on the sub-control board 90.

[Interrupt Processing by the Image and Sound Control Board 100]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the audiovisual control board 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the audiovisual control board 100. During normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the audiovisual control board 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Fig. 48 every fixed time (for example, 33 milliseconds).

First, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes image display control processing to control image display on the display screen 70 based on commands received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 49.

Following the processing of step S71, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes a sound effect output control process to output various sound effects from the speaker 38 either synchronously or asynchronously with the screen display on the display screen 70 (step S72).

Following the processing of step S72, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes a data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data related to the image and sound control performed by the image and sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-control board 90 transfers the data received from the image and sound control board 100 to the lamp control board 120. This controls the frame lamps 37, panel lamps 5, movable decorative members 14, etc. so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and speakers 38.

[Image display control processing by the image and sound control board 100]
Fig. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of Fig. 48. The image and sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, if the image and sound control CPU 101 determines that it has received a command from the sub-control board 90 (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Then, based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list for controlling the drawing processing of the VDP 104, stores it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103 (step S713), and sets this display list in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). The VDP 104 executes the drawing processing based on the display list set in this display list storage area, thereby realizing the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90.

The configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operating modes of each component described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operating modes. Furthermore, the processing order, setting values, random number values, threshold values used for judgment, etc. in the above flowchart are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. The drawings and other examples shown in the above embodiment are also merely examples, and other modes are possible.

1 Gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 7 Image display device, 21 First start opening, 22 Second start opening, 23 Opening/closing member, 26 First large prize opening, 28 Second large prize opening, 41 First special symbol display, 42 Second special symbol display, 70 Display screen, 80 Main control board, 81 Main CPU, 90 Sub-control board, 91 Sub-CPU, 100 Image and sound control board, 101 Image and sound control CPU, 211 First start opening sensor, 221 Second start opening sensor, 261 First large prize opening sensor, 262 First large prize opening solenoid, 281 Second large prize opening sensor, 282 Second large prize opening solenoid, 283 V prize opening sensor, 284 Discharge opening sensor, 285 Slide member, 286 V prize opening solenoid, 287 V prize opening.

Claims (1)

an input means for allowing input by a player;
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, causing a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol and then statically display a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game will be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
a reservation means capable of reserving the right to make the judgment;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed before the determination is made on the right reserved by the reservation means;
a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
Along with the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to variably display a performance symbol that notifies the result of the judgment,
During a first variable display that displays a variable effect pattern, a first input prompt notification is executed to prompt a player to input to the input means, and a first effect control is executed in response to the input to the input means;
During a second variable display that displays a variable effect pattern after the first variable display, a second input prompt notification is executed to prompt the player to input to the input means, and a second effect control is executed to execute a second input-responsive effect in response to the input to the input means;
a reserve suggestion image is displayed, which suggests that the right to make the judgment is reserved, and a change effect display is executed, which changes the display mode of the reserve suggestion image from a first display mode to a second display mode, which suggests that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first display mode, based on the result of the advance judgment corresponding to the right to make the judgment;
The first input corresponding effect is an effect different from the change effect display, which is executed without using the hold suggestion image,
The first input-responsive effects include a first possibility suggestion effect that displays a first suggestion image that suggests that the possibility of the special game being executed is at a first degree, and a second possibility suggestion effect that displays a second suggestion image that suggests that the possibility is at a second degree higher than the first degree and has display content different from that of the first suggestion image,
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first possibility suggestion effect is executed, the second input prompt notification is executed with a first probability, while, when the second possibility suggestion effect is executed , the second input prompt notification is executed with a second probability higher than the first probability, and the second input prompt notification can be executed even when neither the first possibility suggestion effect nor the second possibility suggestion effect is executed .